511536

Panasonic PT-DW17KE Anleitung

1
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/179
Nächste Seite
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
■ Before using your projector, be sure to read
“
Read this rst!
”
(
pages 2 to 10).
Model No.
PT-DZ21KE
PT-DS20KE
PT-DW17KE
TQBJ0419
DLP
TM
Projector
Commercial Use
Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
ENGLISH
7KHSURMHFWLRQOHQVLVVROGVHSDUDWHO\
Read this rst!
2 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
Read this rst!
Information
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING:
To prevent damage which may result in re or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
Machine Noise Information Ordinance 3. GSGV, January 18, 1991: The sound pressure level at the operator
position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualied
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong
earthingtype mains plug. This plug will only t an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions, which include using
the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
device. If you use serial port to connect PC for external control of projector, you must use optional
RS-232C serial interface cable with ferrite core. Any unauthorized changes or modications to
this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate.
Product information (for Turkey only)
EEE Yönetmeli
ğ
ine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
Read this rst!
ENGLISH - 3
Important
Information
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG (U.K. only)
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp
fuse is tted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a
rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is retted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorised Service Center.
If the tted moulded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely.
There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be tted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualied electrician.
WARNING:
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT:
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings
i
dentifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
or coloured GREEN or GREEN -
AND - YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
13A250V
BS1363/A
HE-8
N
ASA
L
Read this rst!
4 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
WARNING:
POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply
immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in re or electric shock.
z
If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
z
If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
z
If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or re will result.
z
Do not damage the power cord, make any modications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
z
Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in re or electric shocks.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a re.
z
If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
z
If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and re will result.
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, re or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam, ex. a bathroom.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in re, electric shocks or deterioration of components.
Deterioration of components (such as ceiling mount brackets) may cause the projector which is mounted on
the ceiling to fall down.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the
projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
Read this rst!
ENGLISH - 5
Important
Information
WARNING:
Do not cover the air intake/exhaust ports or place anything within 500 mm (20") of them.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause re or damage to the projector.
z
Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
z
Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the air inlet port.
Do not place your hands or other objects close to the air exhaust port.
Doing so will cause burns or damage your hands or other objects.
z
Heated air comes out of the air exhaust port. Do not place your hands or face, or objects which cannot
withstand heat close to this port.
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.
z
Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into
this light.
z
Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and
disconnect the power plug when you are away from the projector.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause re or electric shocks.
z
For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens (optional) attached.
Doing so can cause re.
Do not allow metal objects, ammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in re, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
z
Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
z
If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
z
Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specied by Panasonic.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specied one will result in falling accidents.
z
Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work (such as ceiling mount bracket) should only be carried out by a qualied technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
z
Do not use anything other than an authorized ceiling mount bracket.
z
Be sure to use the wire provided with the ceiling mount bracket as an extra safety measure to prevent the
projector from falling down. (Install in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket.)
Read this rst!
6 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
WARNING:
ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch re.
z
Use AA/R6 batteries.
z
Do not use unspecied batteries.
z
Do not use chargeable batteries.
z
Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
z
Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or re.
z
Do not allow the + and
–
terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
z
Do not store batteries together with metallic objects.
z
Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
z
Make sure the polarities (+ and
–
) are correct when inserting the batteries.
z
Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
z
Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery uid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
z
Battery uid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
z
Battery uid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not remove unspecied screws during the lamp unit replacement.
Doing so can cause electric shocks, burns, or injury.
Do not disassemble the lamp unit.
If the lamp breaks, it could cause injury.
Lamp replacement
The lamp has high internal pressure. If improperly handled, an explosion and severe injury or accidents will
result.
z
The lamp can easily explode if struck against hard objects or dropped.
z
Before replacing the lamp unit, be sure to turn the power off and to disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Electric shocks or explosions can result if this is not done.
z
When replacing the lamp unit, turn the power off and allow the lamp to cool for at least one hour before
handling it otherwise it can cause burns.
z
Be careful to hold the lamp unit cover and to loosen the lamp unit cover xing screws with the projector
installed upward in the vertical direction since the lamp unit cover may open and the lamp case may drop
off on its weight.
This can cause severe injury or accidents.
z
When you loosen or x the lamp case xing screws with the projector installed upward in the vertical
direction, make sure to hold the lamp case handle since the lamp case may drop off on its weight.
This can cause severe injury or accidents.
Do not use the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector.
z
Using the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector may cause short circuits or
overheating, and result in electric shock or re.
Keep accessories (lens xing screws, etc.) out of the reach of small children.
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
z
If you believe that parts have been swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
z
Leaving them in the unit may result in uid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
Read this rst!
ENGLISH - 7
Important
Information
CAUTION:
POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and re, short-circuits or serious electric
shocks will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet and remove the batteries from the remote control.
Failure to do so may result in re or electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
z
Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in re.
z
Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near stoves.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
z
Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage to the object and can cause the set to malfunction.
z
Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause re or electric shocks
to occur.
ACCESSORIES
Do not use the old lamp unit.
If used it could cause lamp explosion.
If the lamp has broken, ventilate the room immediately. Do not touch or bring your face close to the
broken pieces.
Failure to observe this will cause the user to absorb the gas which was released when the lamp broke and which
contains nearly the same amount of mercury as uorescent lamps, and the broken pieces will cause injury.
z
If you believe that you have absorbed the gas or that the gas has got into your eyes or mouth, seek
medical advice immediately.
z
Ask your dealer about replacing the lamp unit and check the inside of the projector.
Do not attach the air lter unit while it is wet.
Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions.
z
After you clean the air lter units, dry them thoroughly before reattaching them.
Do not touch the fan with your ngers or any other parts of your body when replacing the lamp unit.
Doing so can cause injury.
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector once a year.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in re.
z
For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch re or explode, which may result in re
or contamination of surrounding area.
Read this rst!
8 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
CAUTION:
VIEWING 3D VIDEO (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or poor physical health should
not view 3D images.
This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions.
If you feel tiredness or discomfort, or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear, discontinue
viewing.
Continuing use may cause health problems. Take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D movies, aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D images, for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction
is possible, take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
When preparing contents, use contents properly created to be used for 3D.
This may cause eye fatigue or health problems.
When viewing 3D images, pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity.
3D video may be mistaken for actual objects, and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects
and lead to injury.
Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos.
Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear.
Those who are near or far sighted, those with weaker eyesight in one eye, or those with astigmatism
should use corrective glasses etc. when using 3D Eyewear.
If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video, discontinue viewing.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen.
Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue. As with movies, if there are
black bands at the top and bottom of the video, view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video
section.
Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear.
As it is difcult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort their condition may worsen
suddenly.
If a child uses the 3D Eyewear, guardians should beware of the child’s eyes becoming tired.
Read this rst!
ENGLISH - 9
Important
Information
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery
1. Press the guide and lift the cover.
(i)
(ii)
2. Remove the batteries.
Read this rst!
10 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
Trademarks
• Microsoft
®
, Windows
®
, Windows Vista
®
, and Internet Explorer
®
are the registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are the trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other
countries.
• PJLink
TM
is a trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and regions.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC.
• VGA and XGA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• SVGA is a registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standards Association.
• RealD 3D is a trademark of RealD Inc.
• The font used in the on-screen displays is a Ricoh bitmap font, which is manufactured and sold by Ricoh
Company, Ltd.
• Other names, company names or product names used in these operating instructions are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Please note that the operating instructions do not include the ® and TM symbols.
Illustrations in these operating instructions
• Note that illustrations of the projector and screens may differ from the ones you actually see.
Page references
• In these instructions, references to pages are indicated as: (
page 00).
Term
• In these instructions, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessories are referred to as the “Remote
control”.
ENGLISH - 11
Quick StepsQuick Steps
For details, see the corresponding pages.
1. Set up the projector.
(
page 28)
2. Attach the projection lens
(optional accessories)
(
page 43)
3. Connect with other
devices. (
page 44)
4. Connect the power cord.
(
page 48)
5. Switch on the projector.
(
page 50)
6. Make initial settings.
*1
(
page 21)
7. Select the input signal.
(
page 52)
8. Adjust the image.
(
page 52)
*1: These are the steps to be taken when you switch on the
power for the rst time after purchasing the projector.
Features of the ProjectorFeatures of the Projector
▶
An ultra high luminance of
20 000 lm
*1
is achieved while
having a small size due to the
unique optical system, cooling, and
mechanism design.
*1: For PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE. PT-DW17KE has a
luminance of 17 000 lm.
▶
Extensive lineup of optional lenses
allow more exible setup of the
projector.
▶
The new lter reduces the
maintenance cost.
Small size & ultra-high
luminance
Easy setup and improved
serviceability
Improved cost performance
in maintenance fee
Contents
12 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
Preparation Getting Started Basic Operation Settings Maintenance Appendix
Important Information
Read this rst! ............................................ 2
Precautions for use ...................................15
Cautions when transporting .............................15
Cautions when installing .................................. 15
Security ...........................................................18
Disposal ..........................................................18
Cautions on use ..............................................18
Accessories ....................................................19
Optional accessories .......................................20
Preparation
Start-up display .........................................21
About your projector ................................ 22
Remote control ................................................22
Projector body .................................................24
Using the remote control ......................... 27
Inserting and removing the batteries ................27
Setting Remote control ID numbers .................27
Connecting to the projector with a cable ..........27
Getting Started
Setting up .................................................. 28
Projection method ...........................................28
Parts for ceiling mount (optional) .....................28
Screen size and throw distance .......................29
Adjusting adjustable feet .................................42
Attaching/removing the projection lens
(optional accessory) ............................. 43
Attaching the projection lens ............................43
Removing the projection lens ..........................43
Connecting ............................................... 44
Before connecting ...........................................44
Connecting example: AV equipment ................45
Connecting example: Computers .....................47
Basic Operation
Switching on/off the projector ................. 48
Connecting the power cord ..............................48
Power indicator ...............................................49
Switching on the projector ...............................50
Making adjustments and selections .................50
Switching off the projector ............................... 51
Projecting.................................................. 52
Select the input signal .....................................52
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift ................52
Moving the lens to the home position ...............53
Adjustment range by the lens position shift
(optical shift) .............................................54
Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus
is unbalanced ...........................................55
Remote control operation ........................ 58
Using the shutter function ................................58
Using the on-screen display function ...............58
Switching the input ..........................................58
Using the STATUS function .............................59
Using the Automatic setup function ..................59
Using the Function button ................................59
Displaying the internal test pattern ...................60
Changing the picture aspect ratio ....................60
Settings
Menu navigation ........................................61
Navigating through the menu ...........................61
Main menu ......................................................62
Sub-menu .......................................................63
[PICTURE] menu ....................................... 65
[PICTURE MODE] ...........................................65
[CONTRAST] ..................................................66
[BRIGHTNESS] ...............................................66
[COLOR] .........................................................66
[TINT] ..............................................................66
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] ..............................66
[GAMMA] ........................................................68
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] ...........................68
[SHARPNESS] ................................................68
[NOISE REDUCTION] .....................................69
[DYNAMIC IRIS] ..............................................69
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] ...................................70
Making sRGB compliant images ......................71
[POSITION] menu ..................................... 72
[SHIFT] ...........................................................72
[ASPECT] .......................................................72
[ZOOM] ...........................................................73
[CLOCK PHASE] .............................................74
[GEOMETRY] (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only) .....................................74
[KEYSTONE] (PT-DW17KE only) ....................76
[ADVANCED MENU] ................................. 77
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]...........................77
[BLANKING] ....................................................77
[INPUT RESOLUTION] ....................................78
[CLAMP POSITION] ........................................78
[EDGE BLENDING] .........................................78
[FRAME RESPONSE] .....................................80
[FRAME LOCK] (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only) .....................................80
[RASTER POSITION] ......................................80
Contents
Be sure to read “Read this rst!”. (
pages
2 to 10)
Contents
ENGLISH - 13
Important
Information
PreparationGetting StartedBasic OperationSettingsMaintenanceAppendix
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu ...................81
Changing the display language ........................ 81
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only) .................................. 82
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] ..................................82
[3D SYNC SETTING] ......................................82
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] ..........................83
[3D INPUT FORMAT] ......................................84
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] ......................................84
[3D COLOR MATCHING] ................................84
[3D PICTURE BALANCE] ...............................85
[DARK TIME SETTING] ..................................85
[3D FRAME DELAY]........................................86
[3D TEST MODE] ............................................86
[3D TEST PATTERN] ......................................86
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] ...........87
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] ........................87
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu ......................... 88
[COLOR MATCHING] ......................................88
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION] ..................89
[SCREEN SETTING] (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only) .....................................90
[AUTO SIGNAL] ..............................................90
[AUTO SETUP] ...............................................91
[RGB IN] (supported during RGB signal
input only) .................................................92
[DVI-D IN] ........................................................92
[HDMI IN] ........................................................93
[SDI IN] (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only) ....93
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] .................................94
[BACK COLOR] ..............................................95
[STARTUP LOGO] ..........................................95
[UNIFORMITY] ................................................95
[SHUTTER SETTING] .....................................96
[FREEZE] ........................................................96
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] ................................96
[CUT OFF] ......................................................98
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu .................... 99
[PROJECTOR ID] ............................................99
[PROJECTION METHOD] ...............................99
[COOLING CONDITION] ............................... 100
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] ..............................100
[LAMP SELECT] ...........................................100
[LAMP RELAY] .............................................. 101
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] ........................... 102
[STANDBY MODE] ........................................ 106
[SCHEDULE] ................................................. 106
[RS-232C] .....................................................108
[STATUS] ......................................................109
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] .............................. 110
[REMOTE2 MODE] ....................................... 110
[FUNCTION BUTTON] .................................. 110
[DATE AND TIME] ......................................... 110
[LENS CALIBRATION] ...................................111
[LENS MEMORY] .......................................... 112
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] ............................... 113
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] .............................. 113
[INITIALIZE]................................................... 114
[SERVICE PASSWORD] ............................... 114
[P IN P] menu ...........................................115
Using P IN P functions ................................... 115
Setting P IN P functions ................................. 115
[TEST PATTERN] menu ...........................117
[TEST PATTERN] .......................................... 117
[SIGNAL LIST] menu ...............................118
Registering a signal to the list ........................ 118
Renaming the registered data ....................... 118
Deleting the registered data ........................... 118
Protecting the registered data ........................ 119
Expanding signal lock-in range ...................... 119
Managing the sub memory list .......................120
[SECURITY] menu ...................................121
[SECURITY PASSWORD] ............................. 121
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] ............. 121
[DISPLAY SETTING] .....................................122
[TEXT CHANGE] ...........................................122
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] ........................122
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
...124
[NETWORK] menu ...................................125
[NETWORK SETUP] ..................................... 125
[NETWORK CONTROL] ............................... 125
[NETWORK STATUS] ................................... 125
Network connections .....................................126
Accessing from the Web browser .................. 127
Maintenance
Lamp/Temperature/Filter Indicators .......142
Managing the indicated problems ..................142
Maintenance/replacement .......................144
Before maintaining/replacing the unit ............. 144
Maintenance .................................................144
Replacing the unit ..........................................146
Troubleshooting ......................................151
Self-diagnosis display .............................153
Contents
14 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
Preparation Getting Started Basic Operation Settings Maintenance Appendix
Appendix
Technical information ..............................156
PJLink protocol ..............................................156
Control commands via LAN ........................... 157
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal ..........160
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal .............................. 164
Two window display combination list .............. 165
Control device password ............................... 166
Upgrade kit (only supports PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE) ........................................... 166
List of compatible signals ............................... 167
Specications ..........................................172
Dimensions ..............................................175
Ceiling mount bracket safeguards .........176
Index ........................................................177
Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 15
Important
Information
Precautions for use
Cautions when transporting
z
The projection lens (optional accessory) is susceptible to effects due to vibration or impact. Make sure to
remove the lens when transporting.
z
When transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts. Not
doing so may damage the internal parts and result in malfunctions.
z
Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
■
After removing the projection lens (optional accessory), attach the dust-
proof sponge included with the projector.
If the cover is not attached, dust will accumulate inside and may cause malfunctions.
■
Do not set up the projector outdoors.
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
■
Do not set up the projector in the following locations.
z
Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may damage the internal
parts and result in malfunctions.
z
Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may uctuate due
to the hot air from the air exhaust port or the heated or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure that
the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward
the front of the projector.
z
Near lights (studio lamps, etc.) where temperature changes greatly (“Operating environment” (
page 174)):
Doing so may shorten the life of the lamp or result in deformation of the outer case and malfunctions.
z
Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
z
Place where there is a high-power laser equipment: It may cause malfunction in DLP chips when the laser
beam enters the lens.
■
Be sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the
product to a ceiling.
If the product is to be installed hanging from the ceiling, purchase an optional Ceiling Mount Attachment.
Model No.: ET-PKD510H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings)
■
Lens focus
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus
unstable in the period just after switching on the power. Wait at least 30 minutes with the image projected
before adjusting the lens focus.
■
Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector
at elevations of 1 400 m (4 593 ft) or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858 ft)
above sea level.
Failure to do so may shorten the life of the internal parts and result in malfunctions.
■
Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [OFF] when using the projector
at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593 ft) above sea level.
Failure to do so may shorten the life of the internal parts and result in malfunctions.
■
Do not install the projector at elevations of 2 700 m (8 858 ft) or higher above
sea level.
Doing so may shorten the life of the internal parts and result in malfunctions.
Precautions for use
16 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
■
Do not use the projector tilted to the right or left
Using the projector at a vertical angle that exceeds 15° may reduce product life or result in malfunction.
■
When installing and using the projector at an angle that exceeds 30°
vertically, set [COOLING CONDITION] (
page 100).
Failure to observe this will result in malfunctions or shorten the life of the lamp or other components.
■
Cautions when setting up the projector
z
When installing and using the projector with a method other than the oor standing installation using the
adjustable feet, x the projector using the six screw holes for ceiling mounting (see the gure below). (Screw
diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the set: 30 mm (1-3/16"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
110
(4-11/32")
145
(5-23/32")
48
(1-7/8")
298 (11-23/32")
548 (21-9/16")
25 mm (31/32")
12 mm (15/32")
12 mm (15/32")
30 mm (1-3/16")
30 mm (1-3/16")
110
(4-11/32")
135.5
(5-11/32")
145
(5-23/32")
110
(4-11/32")
M6
M6
Bottom view
Model No. of ceiling mount bracket: ET-PKD510H (for high ceilings)
ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings)
Torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m
Screw holes for ceiling mount
Screw hole depthMax. screw hole depth
Max. screw hole depth
Embedded nut
(Screw hole depth)
Space
Unit: mm
Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 17
Important
Information
z
Do not stack projectors on top of each other.
z
Do not use the projector tilted at an angle that
exceeds ±15° from the horizontal plane.
z
Prevent hot and cool air from the air
conditioning system to blow directly to the
ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the
projector.
z
Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and
exhaust) of the projector.
z
Make a clearance of at least 5 mm (0.2") between the projector bottom and setting surface by inserting
spacers (metallic) etc. between them.
0RXQW
6SDFHU
*DSPPRUPRUH
3OHDVHHQVXUHWKHLQIORZRI
DLULQWRWKHDLULQWDNHSRUW
7KLVFRXOGEHDUHDVRQIRU
WKHSURMHFWRUWRQRWZRUN
SURSHUO\
z
The adjustable feet can be removed if not needed in the installation. However, do not use the screw holes
where the adjustable feet was removed to x the projector in place.
Also, do not install other screws not specied in the instruction manuals of accessories in the adjustable
feet’s screw holes.
Doing so may damage the set.
z
Use the adjustable feet only for the oor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using it for other
purposes may damage the set.
Precautions for use
18 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
PPRUPRUH PPRUPRUH PPRUPRUH
PPRUPRUH
z
Do not install the projector in a conned space.
When it is necessary to install the projector in a conned space, install the air conditioning or ventilation
separately. Exhaust heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection
circuit of the projector.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
z
Personal information being leaked via this product
z
Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
z
Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufcient security measures. (
pages 121, 140)
z
Make your password difcult to guess as much as possible.
z
Change your password periodically.
z
Panasonic Corporation or its afliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge
your password in case you receive such inquiries.
z
The connecting network must be secured by a rewall, etc.
z
Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in.
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.
The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for correct
methods of disposal.
Cautions on use
■
To get a good picture quality
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or
blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps
from shining onto the screen.
■
Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from ngerprints or anything else, this will be magnied and
projected onto the screen. Please put the lens cover (accessory) on the projector when you do not use it.
■
DLP chips
z
The DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or
always lit. This is not a malfunction.
z
Directing a high-power laser beam onto the lens surface can damage the DLP chips.
■
Do not move the projector while it is operating or subject it to vibration or
impact.
Doing so may shorten the service life of its internal components.
■
Lamp
The luminous source of the projector is a high-pressure mercury lamp.
A high-pressure mercury lamp has the following characteristics.
Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 19
Important
Information
z
The luminance of the lamp will decrease by duration of usage.
z
The lamp may burst with a loud sound or have its service life shortened because of shock, chipping, or
degradation due to cumulative operating time.
z
The lamp life varies greatly depending on individual differences and usage conditions. In particular,
frequent on/off switching of the power greatly deteriorate the lamp and affect the lamp life.
z
Continuous use for over 1 week will deteriorate the lamp. The degradation of the lamp due to continuous
usage can be reduced by lamp relay function. (
page 101)
z
In rare cases, the lamps burst shortly after projection starts.
z
The risk of bursting increases when the lamp is used beyond its replacement cycle. Make sure to replace
the lamp unit regularly.
(“When to replace the lamp unit” (
page 148), “Replacing the lamp unit” (
page 148))
z
If the lamp bursts, gas contained inside of the lamp is released in a form of smoke.
z
It is recommended that you store replacement lamp units for contingency.
■
Viewing 3D video (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
The projector can display 3D video signals that are input by the “simultaneous”, “frame packing method”,
and “side by side” methods. You are required to prepare external devices for viewing 3D video (such as 3D
Eyewear, video signal output devices) which are suitable for your 3D system. For connections of the projector
and external devices, see the instructions of external devices you use. Refer to “List of 3D compatible signals”
(
page 169) for the types of 3D video signals that can be used with the projector.
<Software information regarding this product>
© Panasonic Corporation 2012
This product is equipped with the following software:
(1) Software which is developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation
(2) Software which is licensed under GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
(3) Software which is licensed under GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
For license conditions related to software in (2) and (3), refer to the provisions of the software licenses (GNU GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE) in the supplied CD-ROM.
If you have any questions regarding the software, please contact us via email (sav.pj.gpl.pavc@ml.jp.panasonic.com).
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Service Europe, a division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the
number of accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control
unit <1>
(N2QAYB000769)
Power cord <1>
(K2CM3YY00007)
Power cord <1>
(K2CT3YY00014)
CD-ROM <1>
(TXFQB02VKR9)
AA/R6 battery <2>
Lens xing screw <1>
(XYN4+J18FJ)
(For remote control unit)
Precautions for use
20 - ENGLISH
Important
Information
Attention
z
After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
z
For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
z
Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Note
z
The model numbers of accessories and optional components are subject to change without notice.
■
Contents of the supplied CD-ROM
The contents of the supplied CD-ROM are as follows.
Instruction/list (PDF) Software
z
Operating Instructions - Functional
Manual
z
Multi Projector Monitoring & Control
Software Operation Manual
z
Logo Transfer Software Operating
Instructions
z
List of Compatible Projector Models

This is a list of projectors that are compatible with
the software contained in the CD-ROM and their
restrictions.
z
Software license
(GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, GNU
LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE)
z
Multi Projector Monitoring & Control
Software (Windows)

This software allows you to monitor and control
multiple projectors connected to the LAN.
z
Logo Transfer Software (Windows)

This software allows you to create original
images, such as company logos to be displayed
when projection starts, and transfer them to the
projector.
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
(product name)
Model No.
Projection lens
ET-D75LE6 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE8 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE10 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE20 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE30 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE40 (Zoom lens),
ET-D75LE50 (Fixed-Focus Lens)
Ceiling mount bracket ET-PKD510H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings)
Frame ET-PFD510
Replacement lamp unit ET-LAD510 (1 pc), ET-LAD510F (4 pcs)
Replacement lter unit ET-EMF510
Smoke cut lter ET-SFR510
Upgrade kit ET-UK20 (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
Start-up display
ENGLISH - 21
Preparation
Start-up display
The initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase as well as
when [ALL USER DATA] (
page 114) in [INITIALIZE] is executed. Set them in accordance with circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
Note
z
When the projector is used for the rst time, you may be required to adjust the focus, zoom, and shift to display
the menu screen clearly.
Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift” (
page 52) for details.
■
Initial setting (display language)
Select the language to show on the screen. (
page 81)
1) Press

to select the desired
language.
ENTER
INITIAL SETTING
PLEASE SELECT LANGUAGE.
SELECT
SET
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed
to the initial setting.
■
Initial setting (projector setup)
Set each item.
1) Press

to select an item.
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the setting.
ENTER
16：10
SWITCH TO HIGH ALTITUDE MODE
"ON" IF OVER 1400m(4593Ft).
MENU SELECT CHANGE
SET
INITIAL SETTING
PROJECTION METHOD
COOLING CONDITION
SCREEN FORMAT
SCREEN POSITION
HIGH ALTITUDE MODE
FRONT/FLOOR
FLOOR SETTING
OFF
Refer to the following page for details of each
item.
z
[PROJECTION METHOD] (
page 99)
z
[COOLING CONDITION] (
page 100)
z
[SCREEN FORMAT] (
page 90)
z
[SCREEN POSITION] (
page 90)
z
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] (
page 100)
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
Conrm the setting value to complete the initial
setting.
Note
z
If you press the <MENU> button in the initial setting
(projector setup) screen, you can go back to the
initial setting (display language) screen.
z
You can set [SCREEN FORMAT] and [SCREEN
POSITION] for PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE.
About your projector
22 - ENGLISH
Preparation
About your projector
Remote control
■
Front
(1) Remote control indicator
Flashes if any button in the remote control is pressed.
(2)
Power standby <
> button
Sets the projector to the standby mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON>.
(3)
Power on <
> button
Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on
the projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched
off (standby mode).
(4) Input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>,
<VIDEO>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>) buttons
Switches the input signal to project. (
page 58)
(5) <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/
󱚣󱚤
buttons
Used to operate the menu screen. (
page 61)
(6) <ON SCREEN> button
Switches on (display)/off (not display) the on-screen
display function. (
page 58)
(7) <TEST> button
Displays the test pattern. (
page 60)
(8) Number (<0> - <9>) buttons
Used when the system uses multiple projectors.
Used to input ID numbers or passwords.
(9) <STATUS> button
Displays the projector information.
(10) <LIGHT> button
Pressing this button lights up the remote control buttons.
The lights will go off when the remote control operation
goes idle for 10 seconds.
(11) <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while
projecting the image.
[PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while the image
is adjusted automatically. (
page 59)
(12) <SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (
page 58)
(13) <ASPECT> button
Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (
page 60)
(14) Lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons
Adjusts the projection lens. (
pages 50, 52)
(15) <FUNC> button
You can assign a frequently used operation to a shortcut
button. (
page 59)
(16) <DEFAULT> button
Restores the contents of the sub-menu to factory default.
(
page 62)
(17) <ID SET> button
Sets the ID number of the remote control when the
system uses multiple projectors.
(
page 27)
(18) <ID ALL> button
Simultaneously controls all the projectors with one
remote control when the system uses multiple projectors.
(
page 27)
About your projector
ENGLISH - 23
Preparation
(19) <LOCK> button
Used to prevent unintended operation by careless pressing of the buttons and prevent draining the remote control batteries.
Attention
z
Do not drop the remote control.
z
Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
z
Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
Note
z
The remote control can be used within a distance of about 30 m (98'5") if pointed directly at the remote control
receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±15° vertically and ±30° horizontally, but the effective
control range may be reduced.
z
If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote
control may not operate properly.
z
The signal will be reected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited due to light reection
loss because of the screen material.
z
If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as uorescent light, the remote control
may not operate properly. Use it in a place distant from the light source.
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash if the projector receives a remote control signal.
■
Side
■
Top
Remote control signal transmitter
■
Bottom
Remote control wired terminal
(
page 27)
About your projector
24 - ENGLISH
Preparation
Projector body
■
Front
■
Rear
■
Side
 
   
)URQW
 
)URQW
(1) Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
The power indicator displays power status.
(2) Lamp indicator <LAMP1>
Displays the status of lamp 1.
(3) Lamp indicator <LAMP2>
Displays the status of lamp 2.
(4) Lamp indicator <LAMP3>
Displays the status of lamp 3.
(5) Lamp indicator <LAMP4>
Displays the status of lamp 4.
(6) Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Displays the internal temperature status.
(7) Filter indicator <FILTER>
Displays the status of the air lter unit.
(8) Adjustable feet
Adjusts the projection angle.
(9) Remote control signal receiver (front)
(10) Air intake port
(11) Projection lens cover
(12) Lamp unit cover (
page 148)
(13) Remote control signal receiver (rear)
(14) Air exhaust port
(15) Control panel and connecting terminals lights
(16) Control panel (
page 25)
(17) Connecting terminals (
page 26)
(18) Security slot
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington
security cables.
(19) <AC IN> terminal
Connect the supplied power cord.
(20) <MAIN POWER> switch
Turns on/off the main power.
(21) Air lter cover
The air lter unit is inside. (
page 144)
About your projector
ENGLISH - 25
Preparation
■
Bottom

)URQW
(22) Burglar hook port
You can attach a commercial burglar prevention cable.
Attention
z
Keep your hands and other objects away from the
air exhaust port.

Keep your hands and face away.

Do not insert your ngers.

Keep heat-sensitive objects away.
Heated air from the air outlet port can cause bums,
injury, or deformations.
z
Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and
exhaust) of the projector.
■
Control panel
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(17)
(16)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1)
Power standby <
> button
Sets the projector to the standby mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON>.
(2)
Power on <
> button
Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched off
(standby mode).
(3) <VIDEO> button
Switches to VIDEO input.
(4) <RGB1> button
Switches to RGB1 input.
(5) <RGB2> button
Switches to RGB2 input.
(6) <DVI-D> button
Switches to DVI-D input.
(7) <HDMI> button
Switches to HDMI input.
(8) <SDI 1/2> button
Switches to SDI input.
(Only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
(9) Input selection terminal indicator
Indicator which shows the selected input terminal. This
lights up when an image signal is being input in the
selected input terminal, and ashes when there is no
image signal.
(10) <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while
projecting the image.
[PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while the image
is adjusted automatically. (
page 59)
(11) <MENU> button
Displays the main menu.
Returns to the previous menu when the menu is displayed.
(
page 61)
If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for
at least three seconds while the on-screen indication is off,
the on-screen display is turned on.
(12) <LENS> button
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and shift (position) of the lens.
(13) <ENTER> button
Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
(14) <SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (
page 58)
(15)
󱚣󱚤
buttons
Use to select items in the menu screen, change settings,
and adjust levels.
It is also used to enter [SECURITY] passwords.
(16) <LIGHT> switch
Light switch for the connecting terminals and the control
panel.
(17) Self-diagnosis display
Automatically shows errors and warnings, and their details.
(
page 153)
About your projector
26 - ENGLISH
Preparation
■
Connecting terminals
z
For PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
z
For PT-DW17KE
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (12)
(1) <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal / <REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal
These are the terminals to connect the remote control for
serial control when the system uses multiple projectors.
(2) <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using
the external control circuit.
(3) <SERIAL IN> terminal
This is a RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control
the projector by connecting a computer.
(4) <SERIAL OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the
serial input terminal.
(5) <SDI IN 1> terminal / <SDI IN 2> terminal
This is a terminal to input the SDI signal.
(Only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
(6) <HDMI IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input the HDMI signal.
(7) <RGB 1 IN> (<R/P
R
>, <G/Y>, <B/P
B
/C>, <SYNC/HD>,
<VD>) terminal
This is a terminal to input RGB signals or the YC
B
C
R
/
YP
B
P
R
and Y/C signals.
(8) <RGB 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input RGB signals or YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals.
(9) <DVI-D IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input DVI-D signals.
(10) <VIDEO IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input video signals.
(11) <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal / <3D SYNC 2 OUT>
terminal
This is a terminal to input or output control signals when
using the projector in 3D systems.
(Only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
(12) <LAN> terminal
This is a terminal to connect to the network.
Used for control and monitoring. Image input through
network connections is not possible.
Attention
z
When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Using the remote control
ENGLISH - 27
Preparation
Using the remote control
Inserting and removing the
batteries
1) Open the cover.
(i)
(ii)
2) Insert the batteries and close the cover
(insert the
side rst).
z
When removing the batteries, perform the steps
in reverse order.
Setting Remote control ID
numbers
When you use the system with multiple projectors,
you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or
each projector individually using single remote control,
if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same
ID number on the remote control.
The ID number of the projector is set to [ALL] as
the factory default. When using a single projector,
press the <ID ALL> button on the remote control.
Also, you can perform control operations if you
push the <ID ALL> button on the remote control
even if you do not know the projector ID.
■
How to set
1) Press the <ID SET> button on the
remote control.
2) Within ve seconds, press the two-
digit ID number set on the projector
using the number (<0> - <9>) buttons.
z
If you press the <ID ALL> button, you can
operate the projectors regardless of the setting
of the projector’s ID number.
Attention
z
Since setting of the ID number on the remote
control can be performed even without the projector,
do not press the <ID SET> button carelessly. If the
number (<0> - <9>) buttons are not pressed within
ve seconds after the <ID SET> button is pressed,
the ID number returns to its original value before
pressing the <ID SET> button.
z
The ID number set on the remote control will
be stored unless it is set again. However, it will
be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the
batteries are replaced.
Note
z
Set the ID number of the projector from the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID]
(
page 99).
Connecting to the projector
with a cable
When you use the system with multiple projectors,
congure the units as in the following gure. Use a
commercial M3 stereo mini jack cable and connect
the other devices to the <REMOTE 1 IN>/<REMOTE
1 OUT> terminals of the projector.
The remote control is effective even in places where
an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices
are susceptible to outside light.
Connecting terminals
Connecting to a
second projector
M3 stereo mini jack cable
(commercially available)
Remote control
Connects to the remote
control wired terminal
Attention
z
Use a cable that is 15 m (49'2") or shorter, with 2
core shield. The remote control may not operate
when the length of the cable exceeds 15 m (49'2")
or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
Setting up
28 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
Setting up
Projection method
You can use the projector with any of the following four projection methods. Select the appropriate method
depending on the environment.
■
Mounting on the ceiling and
projecting forward
■
Setting on a desk/oor and
projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item
*1
Method
[PROJECTION
METHOD]
[FRONT/CEILING]
[COOLING
CONDITION]
[CEILING SETTING]
Menu item
*1
Method
[PROJECTION
METHOD]
[REAR/FLOOR]
[COOLING
CONDITION]
[FLOOR SETTING]
■
Mounting on the ceiling and
projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
■
Setting on a desk/oor and
projecting forward
Menu item
*1
Method
[PROJECTION
METHOD]
[REAR/CEILING]
[COOLING
CONDITION]
[CEILING SETTING]
Menu item
*1
Method
[PROJECTION
METHOD]
[FRONT/FLOOR]
[COOLING
CONDITION]
[FLOOR SETTING]
*1: For menu item details, see the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] (
page 99) and [COOLING
CONDITION] (
page 100).
Parts for ceiling mount (optional)
You can install the projector on the ceiling using the optional ceiling mount bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD510H (for
high ceilings), or ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings).
z
Use only the ceiling mount brackets specied for this projector.
z
Refer to the installation manual for the ceiling mount bracket when installing the bracket and the projector.
Attention
z
To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the ceiling mount bracket must be carried out by
your dealer or a qualied technician.
Setting up
ENGLISH - 29
Getting Started
Screen size and throw distance
Refer to the following gures and table describing projection distances to install the projector. Image size and
image position can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position.
Projection screen
Screen
Screen
L (LW/LT)
*1
Projection distance (m)
SH Image height (m)
SW Image width (m)
SD Image diagonal size (m)
*1: LW: Minimum projection distance when the zoom lens is used
LT: Maximum projection distance when the zoom lens is used
Attention
z
Before installing, read “Precautions for use” (
pages 15 to 20).
z
Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room.
Hitting of a laser beam on to the lens can damage the DLP chips.
Setting up
30 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
■
[GEOMETRY] projection range (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
6FUHHQ 6FUHHQ
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
6FUHHQ
3URMHFWLRQGLVWDQFH
$UFUDGLXV
6FUHHQ
3URMHFWLRQGLVWDQFH
$UFUDGLXV
$UFFHQWHU
6FUHHQ
3URMHFWLRQGLVWDQFH
$UFUDGLXV
$UFFHQWHU
6FUHHQ
3URMHFWLRQGLVWDQFH
$UFUDGLXV
Setting up
ENGLISH - 31
Getting Started
z
Standard
Projection lens
Model No.
Only for [KEYSTONE] [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only for [CURVED]
Vertical
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle β (°)
Minimum
value of R2/
L2
Minimum
value of R3/
L3
Minimum
value of R2/
L2
Minimum
value of R3/
L3
ET-D75LE1 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 1.0 2.3 0.6 1.3
ET-D75LE2 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.8 1.6 0.5 0.9
ET-D75LE3 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.1 0.3 0.6
ET-D75LE4 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.4
ET-D75LE5 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 2.0 4.9 1.2 2.9
ET-D75LE6 ±28 ±15 ±10 ±10 1.6 3.9 0.9 2.3
ET-D75LE8 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3
ET-D75LE10 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 1.1 2.6 0.6 1.5
ET-D75LE20 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.7 0.5 1.0
ET-D75LE30 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.2 0.4 0.7
ET-D75LE40 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.4
ET-D75LE50 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 2.0 4.9 1.2 2.9
z
Using optional upgrade kit (ET-UK20)
Projection lens
Model No.
Only [KEYSTONE]
*1
[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only for [CURVED]
Vertical
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
trapezoidal
distortion
correction
angle β (°)
Minimum
value of R2/
L2
Minimum
value of R3/
L3
Minimum
value of R2/
L2
Minimum
value of R3/
L3
ET-D75LE1 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.0
ET-D75LE2 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.2 0.4 0.7
ET-D75LE3 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.5
ET-D75LE4 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.5 0.2 0.3
ET-D75LE5 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.5 3.7 0.9 2.2
ET-D75LE6 ±28 ±15 ±10 ±10 1.2 3.0 0.7 1.7
ET-D75LE8 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.2
ET-D75LE10 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.9 2.0 0.5 1.1
ET-D75LE20 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET-D75LE30 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.5 0.9 0.3 0.5
ET-D75LE40 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.5 0.2 0.3
ET-D75LE50 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.5 3.7 0.9 2.2
*1: Cannot correct [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] if the total exceeds 55° when used at the same time.
Note
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
z
Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
z
Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match above due to the projection lens. Use this
projector within the projection range, otherwise the correction does not work.
Setting up
32 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
■
Projection distance of each projection lens (for PT-DZ21KE)
z
When the screen aspect is 16:10 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.4 to 1.8:1 1.8 to 2.8:1 2.8 to 4.6:1 4.6 to 7.4:1 7.3 to 13.8:1 0.9 to 1.1:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
0.942 1.508 2.01 2.69 2.72 4.10 4.11 6.90 6.91 11.06 10.78 20.56 1.35 1.62
2.03 (80")
1.077 1.723 2.31 3.09 3.12 4.70 4.71 7.90 7.91 12.66 12.37 23.55 1.55 1.86
2.29 (90")
1.212 1.939 2.61 3.49 3.52 5.30 5.31 8.91 8.91 14.25 13.97 26.54 1.76 2.10
2.54 (100")
1.346 2.154 2.91 3.89 3.92 5.90 5.91 9.91 9.91 15.85 15.57 29.53 1.96 2.34
3.05 (120")
1.615 2.585 3.51 4.68 4.73 7.10 7.11 11.91 11.92 19.04 18.76 35.50 2.36 2.82
3.81 (150")
2.019 3.231 4.40 5.88 5.93 8.90 8.91 14.92 14.93 23.82 23.54 44.47 2.96 3.55
5.08 (200")
2.692 4.308 5.89 7.87 7.93 11.91 11.92 19.94 19.95 31.80 31.52 59.41 3.97 4.75
6.35 (250")
3.365 5.385 7.39 9.87 9.93 14.91 14.92 24.95 24.96 39.77 39.49 74.36 4.98 5.96
7.62 (300")
4.039 6.462 8.88 11.86 11.93 17.91 17.92 29.97 29.98 47.75 47.47 89.30 5.99 7.17
8.89 (350")
4.712 7.539 10.37 13.86 13.93 20.91 20.92 34.98 34.99 55.72 55.44 104.24 6.99 8.37
10.16 (400")
5.385 8.616 11.86 15.85 15.94 23.92 23.93 40.00 40.01 63.70 63.42 119.19 8.00 9.58
12.70 (500")
6.731 10.770 14.85 19.84 19.94 29.92 29.93 50.03 50.04 79.65 79.37 149.08 10.01 11.99
15.24 (600")
8.077 12.923 17.83 23.82 23.94 35.93 35.94 60.06 60.07 95.60 95.32 178.96 12.03 14.40
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.3 to 1.7:1 1.7 to 2.4:1 2.4 to 4.7:1 4.6 to 7.4:1 0.7:1 0.7:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
0.942 1.508 1.90 2.46 2.46 3.58 3.56 6.94 6.87 11.04 0.99 1.01
2.03 (80")
1.077 1.723 2.19 2.83 2.82 4.11 4.08 7.96 7.88 12.65 1.15 1.16
2.29 (90")
1.212 1.939 2.47 3.20 3.19 4.64 4.61 8.98 8.88 14.25 1.30 1.32
2.54 (100")
1.346 2.154 2.76 3.56 3.55 5.17 5.13 9.99 9.88 15.85 1.45 1.47
3.05 (120")
1.615 2.585 3.32 4.30 4.28 6.22 6.18 12.03 11.89 19.05 1.76 1.78
3.81 (150")
2.019 3.231 4.18 5.40 5.37 7.81 7.75 15.08 14.90 23.85 2.22 2.24
5.08 (200")
2.692 4.308 5.60 7.24 7.19 10.45 10.38 20.16 19.92 31.86 2.99 3.01
6.35 (250")
3.365 5.385 7.02 9.07 9.00 13.09 13.00 25.25 24.95 39.86 3.76 3.78
7.62 (300")
4.039 6.462 8.44 10.91 10.82 15.73 15.62 30.34 29.97 47.87 4.53 4.56
8.89 (350")
4.712 7.539 9.86 12.74 12.64 18.37 18.24 35.42 34.99 55.87
10.16 (400")
5.385 8.616 11.28 14.58 14.46 21.01 20.86 40.51 40.01 63.87
12.70 (500")
6.731 10.770 14.12 18.25 18.09 26.29 26.11 50.68 50.05 79.88
15.24 (600")
8.077 12.923 16.96 21.92 21.73 31.58 31.35 60.85 60.09 95.89
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
ENGLISH - 33
Getting Started
z
When the screen aspect is 16:9 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.4 to 1.8:1 1.8 to 2.8:1 2.8 to 4.6:1 4.6 to 7.4:1 7.3 to 13.8:1 0.9 to 1.1:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 2.07 2.77 2.80 4.21 4.23 7.09 7.10 11.37 11.09 21.14 1.39 1.66
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.38 3.18 3.21 4.83 4.84 8.13 8.13 13.01 12.73 24.21 1.60 1.91
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 2.68 3.59 3.62 5.45 5.46 9.16 9.16 14.65 14.37 27.29 1.81 2.16
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 2.99 4.00 4.04 6.07 6.08 10.19 10.19 16.29 16.01 30.36 2.01 2.41
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 3.60 4.82 4.86 7.30 7.31 12.25 12.26 19.57 19.29 36.50 2.43 2.90
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 4.53 6.05 6.09 9.15 9.16 15.34 15.35 24.49 24.21 45.72 3.05 3.65
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 6.06 8.10 8.15 12.24 12.25 20.50 20.50 32.69 32.40 61.08 4.08 4.89
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 7.59 10.15 10.21 15.33 15.34 25.65 25.66 40.88 40.60 76.44 5.12 6.13
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 9.13 12.19 12.27 18.41 18.42 30.81 30.81 49.08 48.80 91.79 6.15 7.37
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 10.66 14.24 14.32 21.50 21.51 35.96 35.97 57.28 57.00 107.15 7.19 8.61
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 12.19 16.29 16.38 24.58 24.60 41.12 41.12 65.47 65.19 122.51 8.22 9.85
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 15.26 20.39 20.50 30.76 30.77 51.42 51.43 81.87 81.59 153.23 10.29 12.33
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 18.33 24.49 24.61 36.93 36.94 61.73 61.74 98.26 97.98 183.95 12.36 14.81
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.3 to 1.7:1 1.7 to 2.4:1 2.4 to 4.7:1 4.6 to 7.4:1 0.7:1 0.7:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 1.96 2.53 2.53 3.68 3.66 7.14 7.07 11.36 1.02 1.04
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.25 2.91 2.91 4.23 4.20 8.19 8.10 13.00 1.18 1.20
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 2.54 3.29 3.28 4.77 4.74 9.23 9.13 14.65 1.34 1.36
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 2.83 3.67 3.65 5.31 5.28 10.28 10.16 16.29 1.50 1.51
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 3.42 4.42 4.40 6.40 6.35 12.37 12.23 19.58 1.81 1.83
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 4.29 5.55 5.52 8.03 7.97 15.50 15.32 24.52 2.29 2.31
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 5.75 7.44 7.39 10.74 10.67 20.73 20.48 32.75 3.08 3.10
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 7.21 9.33 9.26 13.46 13.36 25.96 25.64 40.97 3.87 3.89
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 8.67 11.21 11.13 16.17 16.06 31.18 30.80 49.20 4.66 4.68
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 10.13 13.10 12.99 18.88 18.75 36.41 35.96 57.43
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 11.59 14.99 14.86 21.60 21.45 41.64 41.12 65.65
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 14.51 18.76 18.60 27.03 26.84 52.09 51.44 82.11
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 17.44 22.54 22.33 32.46 32.23 62.54 61.76 98.56
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
34 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
z
When the screen aspect is 4:3 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.6 to 2.2:1 2.2 to 3.3:1 3.3 to 5.5:1 5.6 to 8.9:1 8.8 to 16.5:1 1.1 to 1.3:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 2.29 3.06 3.09 4.65 4.66 7.83 7.83 12.54 12.25 23.32 1.54 1.84
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 2.63 3.51 3.55 5.33 5.34 8.96 8.97 14.34 14.06 26.71 1.77 2.11
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 2.96 3.96 4.00 6.01 6.02 10.10 10.10 16.15 15.87 30.09 2.00 2.38
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 3.30 4.41 4.45 6.69 6.70 11.23 11.24 17.96 17.67 33.47 2.22 2.66
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 3.98 5.32 5.36 8.05 8.06 13.50 13.51 21.57 21.28 40.24 2.68 3.20
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 4.99 6.67 6.72 10.09 10.10 16.91 16.92 26.98 26.70 50.39 3.36 4.02
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 6.68 8.93 8.99 13.49 13.50 22.59 22.59 36.01 35.73 67.31 4.50 5.39
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 8.37 11.18 11.25 16.89 16.90 28.27 28.27 45.04 44.76 84.23 5.64 6.76
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 10.06 13.44 13.52 20.29 20.30 33.94 33.95 54.07 53.79 101.14 6.78 8.12
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 11.75 15.70 15.79 23.69 23.70 39.62 39.63 63.10 62.82 118.06 7.92 9.49
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 13.44 17.96 18.05 27.09 27.10 45.30 45.31 72.13 71.85 134.98 9.06 10.85
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 16.82 22.47 22.58 33.89 33.90 56.65 56.66 90.18 89.91 168.81 11.34 13.58
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 20.20 26.98 27.12 40.69 40.70 68.01 68.02 108.24 107.96 202.65 13.62 16.32
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.6 to 2.0:1 2.0 to 2.9:1 2.9 to 5.6:1 5.5 to 8.9:1 0.8:1 0.8:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 2.17 2.80 2.80 4.07 4.04 7.88 7.80 12.52 1.13 1.15
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 2.49 3.22 3.21 4.67 4.64 9.03 8.94 14.34 1.31 1.33
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 2.81 3.63 3.62 5.27 5.23 10.19 10.07 16.15 1.48 1.50
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 3.13 4.05 4.03 5.86 5.82 11.34 11.21 17.96 1.66 1.67
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 3.77 4.88 4.86 7.06 7.01 13.64 13.48 21.59 2.00 2.02
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 4.74 6.13 6.09 8.85 8.79 17.09 16.89 27.02 2.53 2.55
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 6.35 8.21 8.15 11.84 11.76 22.85 22.58 36.09 3.40 3.42
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 7.96 10.28 10.20 14.83 14.73 28.61 28.26 45.15 4.27 4.29
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 9.56 12.36 12.26 17.82 17.70 34.36 33.94 54.21 5.14 5.17
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 11.17 14.44 14.32 20.81 20.67 40.12 39.63 63.27
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 12.78 16.52 16.38 23.80 23.63 45.88 45.31 72.33
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 16.00 20.68 20.49 29.78 29.57 57.39 56.68 90.45
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 19.21 24.83 24.61 35.76 35.51 68.91 68.05 108.58
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
ENGLISH - 35
Getting Started
■
Projection distance of each projection lens (for PT-DS20KE)
z
When the screen aspect is 4:3 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.5 to 2.0:1 2.0 to 3.0:1 3.0 to 5.0:1 5.0 to 8.0:1 7.9 to 15.0:1 1.0 to 1.2:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 2.07 2.77 2.80 4.21 4.23 7.09 7.10 11.37 11.09 21.14 1.39 1.66
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 2.38 3.18 3.21 4.83 4.84 8.13 8.13 13.01 12.73 24.21 1.60 1.91
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 2.68 3.59 3.62 5.45 5.46 9.16 9.16 14.65 14.37 27.29 1.81 2.16
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 2.99 4.00 4.04 6.07 6.08 10.19 10.19 16.29 16.01 30.36 2.01 2.41
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 3.60 4.82 4.86 7.30 7.31 12.25 12.26 19.57 19.29 36.50 2.43 2.90
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 4.53 6.05 6.09 9.15 9.16 15.34 15.35 24.49 24.21 45.72 3.05 3.65
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 6.06 8.10 8.15 12.24 12.25 20.50 20.50 32.69 32.40 61.08 4.08 4.89
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 7.59 10.15 10.21 15.33 15.34 25.65 25.66 40.88 40.60 76.44 5.12 6.13
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 9.13 12.19 12.27 18.41 18.42 30.81 30.81 49.08 48.80 91.79 6.15 7.37
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 10.66 14.24 14.32 21.50 21.51 35.96 35.97 57.28 57.00 107.15 7.19 8.61
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 12.19 16.29 16.38 24.58 24.60 41.12 41.12 65.47 65.19 122.51 8.22 9.85
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 15.26 20.39 20.50 30.76 30.77 51.42 51.43 81.87 81.59 153.23 10.29 12.33
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 18.33 24.49 24.61 36.93 36.94 61.73 61.74 98.26 97.98 183.95 12.36 14.81
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.4 to 1.8:1 1.8 to 2.6:1 2.6 to 5.1:1 5.0 to 8.0:1 0.8:1 0.8:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 1.95 2.52 2.52 3.66 3.64 7.10 7.02 11.28 1.02 1.03
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 2.24 2.89 2.89 4.20 4.17 8.13 8.05 12.92 1.18 1.19
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 2.53 3.27 3.26 4.74 4.71 9.17 9.07 14.56 1.34 1.35
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 2.82 3.64 3.63 5.28 5.24 10.21 10.10 16.19 1.50 1.50
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 3.40 4.39 4.37 6.36 6.31 12.29 12.15 19.46 1.81 1.82
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 4.27 5.52 5.49 7.98 7.92 15.41 15.23 24.37 2.29 2.29
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 5.72 7.39 7.34 10.67 10.60 20.60 20.35 32.54 3.08 3.08
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 7.17 9.27 9.20 13.37 13.28 25.79 25.48 40.72 3.87 3.87
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 8.62 11.14 11.06 16.07 15.96 30.99 30.61 48.89 4.66 4.65
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 10.07 13.02 12.91 18.77 18.63 36.18 35.74 57.07
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 11.52 14.90 14.77 21.46 21.31 41.38 40.87 65.25
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 14.42 18.65 18.48 26.86 26.67 51.77 51.12 81.60
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 17.33 22.40 22.19 32.25 32.03 62.15 61.38 97.95
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
36 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
z
When the screen aspect is 16:9 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.5 to 2.0:1 2.0 to 3.0:1 3.0 to 5.0:1 5.0 to 8.0:1 8.0 to 15.0:1 1.0 to 1.2:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 2.26 3.02 3.06 4.60 4.61 7.74 7.75 12.40 12.12 23.06 1.52 1.82
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.60 3.47 3.51 5.27 5.28 8.86 8.87 14.18 13.90 26.41 1.75 2.09
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 2.93 3.92 3.95 5.95 5.96 9.99 9.99 15.97 15.69 29.76 1.97 2.36
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 3.27 4.36 4.40 6.62 6.63 11.11 11.11 17.76 17.47 33.10 2.20 2.63
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 3.93 5.26 5.30 7.96 7.97 13.35 13.36 21.33 21.04 39.79 2.65 3.17
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 4.94 6.60 6.64 9.98 9.99 16.72 16.73 26.68 26.40 49.83 3.33 3.98
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 6.61 8.83 8.89 13.34 13.35 22.34 22.34 35.61 35.33 66.56 4.45 5.33
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 8.28 11.06 11.13 16.70 16.71 27.95 27.96 44.54 44.26 83.29 5.58 6.68
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 9.95 13.29 13.37 20.07 20.08 33.57 33.57 53.47 53.19 100.02 6.71 8.03
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 11.62 15.52 15.61 23.43 23.44 39.18 39.19 62.40 62.12 116.75 7.84 9.38
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 13.29 17.76 17.85 26.79 26.80 44.80 44.80 71.33 71.05 133.48 8.96 10.73
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 16.63 22.22 22.33 33.51 33.52 56.03 56.03 89.19 88.91 166.95 11.22 13.43
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 19.97 26.69 26.82 40.24 40.25 67.26 67.26 107.04 106.77 200.41 13.47 16.14
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.4 to 1.8:1 1.8 to 2.6:1 2.6 to 5.1:1 5.0 to 8.0:1 0.8:1 0.8:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 2.13 2.75 2.75 4.00 3.97 7.74 7.66 12.31 1.12 1.13
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.44 3.16 3.15 4.59 4.55 8.88 8.78 14.09 1.29 1.30
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 2.76 3.57 3.56 5.17 5.14 10.01 9.90 15.87 1.47 1.47
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 3.08 3.98 3.96 5.76 5.72 11.14 11.01 17.65 1.64 1.64
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 3.71 4.79 4.77 6.94 6.89 13.40 13.25 21.21 1.98 1.99
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 4.66 6.02 5.98 8.70 8.64 16.80 16.60 26.56 2.50 2.50
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 6.24 8.06 8.01 11.64 11.56 22.46 22.19 35.46 3.36 3.36
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 7.82 10.11 10.03 14.58 14.47 28.11 27.77 44.37 4.22 4.22
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 9.40 12.15 12.05 17.51 17.39 33.77 33.36 53.27 5.08 5.08
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 10.98 14.19 14.07 20.45 20.31 39.43 38.95 62.18
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 12.56 16.23 16.10 23.39 23.23 45.09 44.53 71.09
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 15.72 20.32 20.14 29.27 29.06 56.40 55.70 88.90
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 18.88 24.41 24.18 35.15 34.90 67.72 66.88 106.71
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
ENGLISH - 37
Getting Started
■
Projection distance of each projection lens (for PT-DW17KE)
z
When the screen aspect is 16:9 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
1.5 to 2.0:1 2.1 to 3.1:1 3.1 to 5.2:1 5.2 to 8.2:1 8.2 to 15.4:1 1.0 to 1.2:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 2.32 3.10 3.14 4.72 4.73 7.94 7.94 12.71 12.43 23.65 1.56 1.87
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.66 3.56 3.60 5.41 5.42 9.09 9.09 14.54 14.26 27.08 1.79 2.14
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 3.01 4.02 4.06 6.10 6.11 10.24 10.25 16.37 16.09 30.51 2.02 2.42
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 3.35 4.48 4.52 6.79 6.80 11.39 11.40 18.21 17.92 33.94 2.25 2.70
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 4.03 5.39 5.44 8.17 8.18 13.69 13.70 21.87 21.58 40.80 2.72 3.25
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 5.06 6.76 6.81 10.23 10.24 17.15 17.15 27.36 27.08 51.09 3.41 4.08
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 6.77 9.05 9.11 13.68 13.69 22.90 22.91 36.51 36.23 68.25 4.56 5.47
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 8.49 11.34 11.41 17.13 17.14 28.66 28.67 45.67 45.39 85.40 5.72 6.85
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 10.20 13.63 13.71 20.57 20.58 34.42 34.42 54.82 54.54 102.55 6.87 8.24
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 11.91 15.92 16.00 24.02 24.03 40.17 40.18 63.97 63.70 119.70 8.03 9.62
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 13.63 18.21 18.30 27.47 27.48 45.93 45.93 73.13 72.85 136.85 9.18 11.01
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 17.05 22.78 22.90 34.36 34.37 57.44 57.45 91.43 91.16 171.16 11.49 13.78
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 20.48 27.36 27.49 41.25 41.26 68.95 68.96 109.74 109.47 205.46 13.80 16.55
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.4 to 1.9:1 1.8 to 2.7:1 2.7 to 5.2:1 5.1 to 8.2:1 0.8:1 0.8:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
0.872 1.550 2.18 2.82 2.82 4.10 4.07 7.94 7.86 12.62 1.15 1.16
2.03 (80")
0.996 1.771 2.51 3.24 3.23 4.70 4.67 9.10 9.01 14.45 1.33 1.34
2.29 (90")
1.121 1.992 2.83 3.66 3.65 5.31 5.27 10.26 10.15 16.27 1.50 1.51
2.54 (100")
1.245 2.214 3.15 4.08 4.06 5.91 5.87 11.42 11.30 18.10 1.68 1.69
3.05 (120")
1.494 2.657 3.80 4.92 4.89 7.11 7.07 13.74 13.59 21.75 2.03 2.04
3.81 (150")
1.868 3.321 4.78 6.17 6.14 8.92 8.86 17.22 17.02 27.23 2.56 2.57
5.08 (200")
2.491 4.428 6.40 8.27 8.21 11.93 11.85 23.03 22.75 36.36 3.44 3.45
6.35 (250")
3.113 5.535 8.02 10.36 10.28 14.95 14.84 28.83 28.48 45.49 4.33 4.33
7.62 (300")
3.736 6.641 9.64 12.46 12.36 17.96 17.83 34.63 34.20 54.62 5.21 5.21
8.89 (350")
4.358 7.748 11.26 14.55 14.43 20.97 20.82 40.43 39.93 63.75
10.16 (400")
4.981 8.855 12.88 16.65 16.50 23.98 23.81 46.23 45.66 72.88
12.70 (500")
6.226 11.069 16.12 20.83 20.65 30.01 29.80 57.83 57.11 91.14
15.24 (600")
7.472 13.283 19.36 25.02 24.80 36.03 35.78 69.43 68.56 109.40
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
38 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
z
When the screen aspect is 4:3 (unit: m)
Lens type Zoom lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE1 ET-D75LE2 ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6
Throw ratio*
1
2.0 to 2.7:1 2.7 to 4.1:1 4.1 to 6.9:1 6.9 to 11.0:1 10.9 to 20.5:1 1.4 to 1.6:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 2.86 3.82 3.86 5.80 5.81 9.74 9.75 15.59 15.30 29.04 1.92 2.30
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 3.28 4.38 4.42 6.65 6.66 11.15 11.16 17.83 17.55 33.24 2.21 2.64
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 3.70 4.94 4.98 7.49 7.50 12.56 12.57 20.07 19.79 37.44 2.49 2.98
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 4.12 5.50 5.55 8.33 8.34 13.97 13.98 22.31 22.03 41.64 2.77 3.32
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 4.96 6.62 6.67 10.02 10.03 16.79 16.80 26.79 26.51 50.04 3.34 4.00
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 6.21 8.30 8.36 12.55 12.56 21.02 21.03 33.52 33.24 62.64 4.19 5.01
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 8.31 11.11 11.17 16.77 16.78 28.07 28.07 44.72 44.44 83.63 5.60 6.71
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 10.41 13.91 13.99 20.99 21.00 35.12 35.12 55.93 55.65 104.63 7.01 8.40
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 12.51 16.71 16.80 25.21 25.22 42.16 42.17 67.14 66.86 125.63 8.43 10.10
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 14.60 19.51 19.61 29.43 29.44 49.21 49.22 78.34 78.07 146.63 9.84 11.80
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 16.70 22.31 22.43 33.65 33.66 56.26 56.26 89.55 89.28 167.63 11.26 13.49
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 20.89 27.92 28.05 42.09 42.10 70.35 70.36 111.96 111.69 209.62 14.08 16.88
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 25.09 33.52 33.68 50.53 50.54 84.45 84.45 134.38 134.11 251.62 16.91 20.27
Lens type Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio*
1
1.9 to 2.5:1 2.5 to 3.6:1 3.6 to 6.9:1 6.8 to 10.9:1 0.8:1 1.0:1
Screen size Projection distance (L)
Screen
diagonal*
2
(SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Fixed Fixed
1.78 (70")
1.067 1.422 2.69 3.48 3.47 5.05 5.01 9.77 9.66 15.49 1.43 1.44
2.03 (80")
1.219 1.626 3.09 3.99 3.98 5.78 5.75 11.19 11.06 17.72 1.64 1.65
2.29 (90")
1.372 1.829 3.49 4.51 4.49 6.52 6.48 12.61 12.46 19.96 1.86 1.87
2.54 (100")
1.524 2.032 3.88 5.02 4.99 7.26 7.21 14.03 13.86 22.19 2.08 2.08
3.05 (120")
1.829 2.438 4.68 6.05 6.01 8.74 8.68 16.87 16.67 26.67 2.51 2.51
3.81 (150")
2.286 3.048 5.87 7.58 7.53 10.95 10.87 21.13 20.88 33.37 3.16 3.16
5.08 (200")
3.048 4.064 7.85 10.15 10.07 14.64 14.53 28.23 27.89 44.55 4.24 4.24
6.35 (250")
3.810 5.080 9.83 12.71 12.61 18.32 18.20 35.33 34.90 55.73 5.32 5.31
7.62 (300")
4.572 6.096 11.82 15.28 15.15 22.01 21.86 42.43 41.91 66.91 6.40 6.39
8.89 (350")
5.334 7.112 13.80 17.84 17.68 25.70 25.52 49.53 48.92 78.08
10.16 (400")
6.096 8.128 15.78 20.40 20.22 29.39 29.18 56.64 55.93 89.26
12.70 (500")
7.620 10.160 19.75 25.53 25.30 36.76 36.50 70.84 69.95 111.62
15.24 (600")
9.144 12.192 23.72 30.66 30.38 44.14 43.83 85.04 83.98 133.97
*1: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81-m (150") screen size.
*2: The screen size unit is inches.
Note
z
A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur.
z
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied screen size.
Setting up
ENGLISH - 39
Getting Started
To use a screen size not listed in this manual, check the screen size SD and use the following formula to calculate
projection distance.
The unit of the calculation result is m.
■
Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens (for PT-DZ21KE)
Projection lens Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Zoom lens
ET-D75LE1
1.4 to 1.8:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.1732 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.5709 x SD (m) – 0.1004
1.4 to 1.8:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.2087 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.6142 x SD (m) – 0.1004
1.6 to 2.2:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.3307 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.7756 x SD (m) – 0.1004
ET-D75LE2
1.8 to 2.8:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.5748 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.3661 x SD (m) – 0.1064
1.8 to 2.8:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.4291 x SD (m) – 0.1064
2.2 to 3.3:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.7835 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.6772 x SD (m) – 0.1064
ET-D75LE3
2.8 to 4.6:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 2.3661 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 3.9488 x SD (m) – 0.1216
2.8 to 4.6:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.4291 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 4.0591 x SD (m) – 0.1216
3.3 to 5.5:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.6772 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 4.4724 x SD (m) – 0.1216
ET-D75LE4
4.6 to 7.4:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 3.9488 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 6.2795 x SD (m) – 0.1013
4.6 to 7.4:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.0591 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 6.4528 x SD (m) – 0.1013
5.6 to 8.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 4.4724 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 7.1102 x SD (m) – 0.1013
ET-D75LE8
7.3 to 13.8:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 6.2795 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 11.7677 x SD (m) – 0.3598
7.3 to 13.8:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 6.4567 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 12.0945 x SD (m) – 0.3598
8.8 to 16.5:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 7.1102 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 13.3189 x SD (m) – 0.3598
ET-D75LE6
0.9 to 1.1:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 0.7913 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 0.9488 x SD (m) – 0.0736
0.9 to 1.1:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.8150 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 0.9764 x SD (m) – 0.0736
1.1 to 1.3:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 0.8976 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 1.0748 x SD (m) – 0.0736
ET-D75LE10
1.3 to 1.7:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.1181 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.4449 x SD (m) – 0.1085
1.3 to 1.7:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.1496 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.4843 x SD (m) – 0.1085
1.6 to 2.0:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.2677 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.6378 x SD (m) – 0.1085
ET-D75LE20
1.7 to 2.4:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 1.4331 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.0787 x SD (m) – 0.1162
1.7 to 2.4:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.4724 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.1378 x SD (m) – 0.1162
2.0 to 2.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.3543 x SD (m) – 0.1162
ET-D75LE30
2.4 to 4.7:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 2.0630 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.0039 x SD (m) – 0.1765
2.4 to 4.7:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.1220 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.1142 x SD (m) – 0.1765
2.9 to 5.6:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.3386 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.5315 x SD (m) – 0.1765
Setting up
40 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
Projection lens Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Zoom lens ET-D75LE40
4.6 to 7.4:1 16:10
Min. (LW) L = 3.9528 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 6.3031 x SD (m) – 0.1615
4.6 to 7.4:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.0630 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 6.4764 x SD (m) – 0.1615
5.5 to 8.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 4.4764 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 7.1339 x SD (m) – 0.1615
Fixed-focus
lens
ET-D75LE5
0.7:1 16:10
— L = 0.6063 x SD (m) – 0.0835
0.7:1 16:9
— L = 0.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0835
0.8:1 4:3
— L = 0.6850 x SD (m) – 0.0835
ET-D75LE50
0.7:1 16:10
— L = 0.6063 x SD (m) – 0.0713
0.7:1 16:9
— L = 0.6260 x SD (m) – 0.0713
0.8:1 4:3
— L = 0.6890 x SD (m) – 0.0713
■
Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens (for
PT-DS20KE)
Projection lens Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Zoom lens
ET-D75LE1 1.5 to 2.0:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.2087 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.6142 x SD (m) – 0.1004
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.3150 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.7559 x SD (m) – 0.1004
ET-D75LE2 2.0 to 3.0:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.4291 x SD (m) – 0.1064
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.7638 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.6457 x SD (m) – 0.1064
ET-D75LE3 3.0 to 5.0:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.4291 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 4.0591 x SD (m) – 0.1216
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.6457 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 4.4213 x SD (m) – 0.1216
ET-D75LE4 5.0 to 8.0:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 4.0591 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 6.4528 x SD (m) – 0.1013
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.4213 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 7.0315 x SD (m) – 0.1013
ET-D75LE8
7.9 to 15.0:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 6.4567 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 12.0945 x SD (m) – 0.3598
8.0 to 15.0:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 7.0315 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 13.1732 x SD (m) – 0.3598
ET-D75LE6 1.0 to 1.2:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 0.8150 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 0.9764 x SD (m) – 0.0736
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.8858 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 1.0630 x SD (m) – 0.0736
ET-D75LE10 1.4 to 1.8:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.1417 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.4764 x SD (m) – 0.1085
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.2441 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.6102 x SD (m) – 0.1085
ET-D75LE20 1.8 to 2.6:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.4606 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.1260 x SD (m) – 0.1162
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.5906 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.3150 x SD (m) – 0.1162
ET-D75LE30 2.6 to 5.1:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.1102 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.0906 x SD (m) – 0.1765
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.2953 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.4567 x SD (m) – 0.1765
ET-D75LE40 5.0 to 8.0:1
4:3
Min. (LW) L = 4.0394 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 6.4370 x SD (m) – 0.1615
16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.3976 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 7.0118 x SD (m) – 0.1615
Fixed-focus
lens
ET-D75LE5 0.8:1
4:3
— L = 0.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0835
16:9
— L = 0.6772 x SD (m) – 0.0835
ET-D75LE50 0.8:1
4:3
— L = 0.6220 x SD (m) – 0.0713
16:9
— L = 0.6772 x SD (m) – 0.0713
Setting up
ENGLISH - 41
Getting Started
■
Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens (for
PT-DW17KE)
Projection lens Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
Zoom lens
ET-D75LE1
1.5 to 2.0:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.3504 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 1.8031 x SD (m) – 0.1004
2.0 to 2.7:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.6496 x SD (m) – 0.0760
Max. (LT) L = 2.2047 x SD (m) – 0.1004
ET-D75LE2
2.1 to 3.1:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.8110 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 2.7126 x SD (m) – 0.1064
2.7 to 4.1:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.2165 x SD (m) – 0.0795
Max. (LT) L = 3.3228 x SD (m) – 0.1064
ET-D75LE3
3.1 to 5.2:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.7126 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 4.5315 x SD (m) – 0.1216
4.1 to 6.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 3.3228 x SD (m) – 0.0958
Max. (LT) L = 5.5472 x SD (m) – 0.1216
ET-D75LE4
5.2 to 8.2:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.5315 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 7.2087 x SD (m) – 0.1013
6.9 to 11.0:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 5.5472 x SD (m) – 0.1158
Max. (LT) L = 8.8228 x SD (m) – 0.1013
ET-D75LE8
8.2 to 15.4:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 7.2087 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 13.5039 x SD (m) – 0.3598
10.9 to 20.5:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 8.8228 x SD (m) – 0.3862
Max. (LT) L = 16.5354 x SD (m) – 0.3598
ET-D75LE6
1.0 to 1.2:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 0.9094 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 1.0906 x SD (m) – 0.0736
1.4 to 1.6:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.1142 x SD (m) – 0.0566
Max. (LT) L = 1.3346 x SD (m) – 0.0736
ET-D75LE10
1.4 to 1.9:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.2756 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 1.6496 x SD (m) – 0.1085
1.9 to 2.5:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 1.5630 x SD (m) – 0.0857
Max. (LT) L = 2.0197 x SD (m) – 0.1085
ET-D75LE20
1.8 to 2.7:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 1.6339 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.3701 x SD (m) – 0.1162
2.5 to 3.6:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.0000 x SD (m) – 0.0832
Max. (LT) L = 2.9055 x SD (m) – 0.1162
ET-D75LE30
2.7 to 5.2:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 2.3543 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 4.5669 x SD (m) – 0.1765
3.6 to 6.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 2.8819 x SD (m) – 0.1131
Max. (LT) L = 5.5906 x SD (m) – 0.1765
ET-D75LE40
5.1 to 8.2:1 16:9
Min. (LW) L = 4.5079 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 7.1890 x SD (m) – 0.1615
6.8 to 10.9:1 4:3
Min. (LW) L = 5.5197 x SD (m) – 0.1577
Max. (LT) L = 8.8031 x SD (m) – 0.1615
Fixed-focus
lens
ET-D75LE5
0.8:1 16:9
— L = 0.6929 x SD (m) – 0.0835
1.0:1 4:3
— L = 0.8504 x SD (m) – 0.0835
ET-D75LE50
0.8:1 16:9
— L = 0.6929 x SD (m) – 0.0713
1.0:1 4:3
— L = 0.8465 x SD (m) – 0.0713
Setting up
42 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
Adjusting adjustable feet
Install the projector on a at surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the
projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, the projection screen can be adjusted to be rectangular by adjusting the
adjustable feet. The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in a
horizontal direction.
Extend the adjustable feet by rotating in the direction shown in the gure and retract by rotating in the opposite
direction.
Adjustable range
Front adjustable feet: 12 mm (15/32")
Rear adjustable feet: 12 mm (15/32")
Attention
z
Hot air is expelled from the air exhaust port. Do not touch the air exhaust port directly when adjusting the
adjustable feet. (
page 24)
Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional accessory)
ENGLISH - 43
Getting Started
Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional accessory)
Attaching the projection lens
1) Remove the projection lens cover.
z
While grasp the right and left buttons from
vertical and horizontal directions, pull the lens
cover to remove.
2) Insert by aligning the projection lens
(orange) mark with the mark on the
projector body (a circle to the left
of LOCK) and turn clockwise until it
clicks.
3) Secure the projection lens with the
lens xing screw supplied
*1
.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure it in the
rst screw hole to the right of the projection lens
(orange) mark.
*1: Some lenses may not have a screw hole to use to secure
the projection lens.
4) Attach the projection lens cover.
Attention
z
Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to conrm
that it does not come out.
z
Store the removed dust sponge in a safe place to
transport or store.
Removing the projection lens
1) Remove the projection lens cover.
z
While grasp the right and left buttons from
vertical and horizontal directions, pull the lens
cover to remove.
2) Remove the lens xing screw
*1
.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the rst
screw to the right of the projection lens (orange)
mark.
*1: Some lenses may not have a screw hole to use to secure
the projection lens.
3) While pressing the lock button, turn
the projection lens counterclockwise
to remove.
z
Turn counterclockwise until the projection lens
(orange) mark is at the mark on the projector
body (the circle to the left of LOCK).
/RFNEXWWRQ
4) Attach the projection lens cover and
dust sponge.
Attention
z
Store the removed lens where it will be free from
vibration and impact.
z
Store the removed lens xing screw in a safe place.
Move the lens to the home position before replacing or removing the lens. (
page 53)
Attention
z
Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.
z
Do not touch the lens signal receiver. Dust or dirt may cause defective contact.
z
Do not touch the lens surface with your bare hands.
z
Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
Connecting
44 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
Before connecting
z
Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
z
Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
z
Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is either not supplied
with the device or not available as an option.
z
Video signals containing too much jitter may cause the images on the screen to randomly wobble or wafture. In
this case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.
z
The projector accepts video signals (including Y/C signals), analog RGB signals (synchronous signals are TTL
level), and digital signals.
z
Some computer models are not compatible with the projector.
z
Use a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables. Otherwise the image
may not display properly.
z
Refer to “List of compatible signals” (
page 167) for the types of video signals that can be used with the
projector.
■
<RGB 2 IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name
(4) and (9) are not used.
(5) - (8), (10), and (11) are GND
terminals.
(10)
(6)
(11) (15)
(1) (5)
(1)
R/P
R
(2)
G/G, SYNC/Y
(3)
B/P
B
(12) DDC data
(13) HD/SYNC
(14) VD
(15) DDC clock
■
<HDMI IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(1) T.M.D.S data 2+ (11) T.M.D.S clock shield
(2) T.M.D.S data 2 shield (12) T.M.D.S clock–
Even-numbered pins (2) to (18) (3) T.M.D.S data 2– (13) CEC
(1) (19)
(2) (18)
(4) T.M.D.S data 1+ (14) —
(5) T.M.D.S data 1 shield (15) SCL
(6) T.M.D.S data 1– (16) SDA
(7) T.M.D.S data 0+ (17)
DDC/CEC
GND
Odd-numbered pins (1) to (19) (8) T.M.D.S data 0 shield (18) +5 V
(9) T.M.D.S data 0– (19) Hot plug detection
(10) T.M.D.S clock+
Connecting
Connecting
ENGLISH - 45
Getting Started
■
<DVI-D IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(17)(24)
(16)
(9)
(1)(8)
(1) T.M.D.S data 2– (13) —
(2) T.M.D.S data 2+ (14) +5 V
(3) T.M.D.S data 2/4 shield (15) GND
(4) — (16) Hot plug detection
(5) — (17) T.M.D.S data 0–
(6) DDC clock (18) T.M.D.S data 0+
(7) DDC data (19) T.M.D.S data 0/5 shield
(8) — (20) —
(9) T.M.D.S data 1– (21) —
(10) T.M.D.S data 1+ (22) T.M.D.S clock shield
(11) T.M.D.S data 1/3 shield (23) T.M.D.S clock+
(12) — (24) T.M.D.S clock–
Connecting example: AV equipment
■
For <HDMI IN>/<VIDEO IN>/<LAN> terminals
The following diagram is a connecting example for PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE.
Blu-ray disc player VCR (TBC built-in) Computer for control
Attention
z
Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.

A VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC)

A time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR
z
If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. In such case, connect the time base
corrector (TBC) between the projector.
Note
z
The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected to HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant devices. However, images may not
appear or may not be displayed properly on some devices. (
page 92)
z
The HDMI cable used should be an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that
does not meet HDMI standards is used, video may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
z
The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with an DVI-D terminal by
using a HDMI/DVI conversion cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.
z
The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
Connecting
46 - ENGLISH
Getting Started
■
For <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals (for PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
+'6',VLJQDORU
6'6',VLJQDO
'LJLWDO9&5IRUFRPPHUFLDOXVH
Note
z
Use [SYSTEM SELECTOR] (
page 70) to switch the input format.
z
Some external devices to be connected require [SDI IN] (
page 93) to be set.
z
Use a 5CFB or higher (such as 5CFB, or 7CFB) or a Belden 1694A or higher connection cable to properly
transmit images. Use a connection cable of 100 m (328'1") length or less.
z
To enter dual link signals, the [SDI LINK] in [SDI IN] must be set.
z
Use the same length and same type of cables to connect <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals when entering
dual link signals. If there is a difference of 4 m (13'1") or greater in cable length, images may not be projected
properly.
z
To input dual link signals, connect directly without going through a distributor or other such device to the
external device which outputs signals. A phase difference may occur between the LINK-A signal and the
LINK-B signal and images may not be projected properly.
z
When an unsteady signal is connected, an error in signal detection may occur. In such a case, use the [SYSTEM
SELECTOR] (
page 70) to switch to a system that matches the signal format.
Connecting
ENGLISH - 47
Getting Started
Connecting example: Computers
The following diagram is a connecting example for PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE.
&RPSXWHUIRUFRQWURO
&RPSXWHU
&RPSXWHU
&RPSXWHU
&RPSXWHU
Note
z
The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.
z
For signals that the projector can project, refer to “List of compatible signals” (
page 167).
z
If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset
the resume feature to operate the projector.
z
When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the
<VD> terminal.
z
When entering DVI-D, some external devices to be connected require EDID to be set. (
page 92)
z
Use an HDMI cable that conforms to HDMI standards such as an HDMI High Speed cable. If a cable that does
not meet HDMI standards is used, video may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
z
The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with an DVI-D terminal by
using a HDMI/DVI conversion cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.
Caution
When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each
device and commercially available shielded cables.
Switching on/off the projector
48 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Switching on/off the projector
Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is fully inserted into the projector to prevent removal of the
power cord.
Conrm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the power cord.
For detailed power cord handling, refer to “Read this rst!” (
pages 2 to 10).
■
To attach the power cord
1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN>
terminal and the power cord connector
and insert the plug securely in the
correct direction.
2) Insert the power cord plug into an
electrical outlet.
■
To remove the power cord
1) Conrm that the <MAIN POWER>
switch of the main side is on the
<OFF> side, hold the power plug and
unplug it from the outlet.
2) Remove the power cord from the <AC
IN> terminal while pressing the lock
button on the power cord connector.
Lock Button
Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 49
Basic Operation
Power indicator
The power indicator displays the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY
(R)> before operating the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status Status
No illumination or ashing The main power is switched off.
Red Lit
The power is switched off. (Standby mode.)
Projection will start if the power on <
> button is pressed.
z
The projector may not operate when the lamp indicators
<LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4> or temperature indicator
<TEMP> is ashing (
page 142).
Green Lit Projecting.
Orange Lit
The projector is preparing to switch off the power.
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby
mode.)
Note
z
In about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the lamp
indicators will not light up even if the power is switched on. After the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
lights in red, turn on the power again.
z
The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lit in red).
Refer to “Power consumption” (
page 172) for the power consumption.
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash in green if a remote control signal is received.
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will ash slowly in green while the shutter is closed. (
page 58)
z
If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is ashing in red, consult your dealer.
Switching on/off the projector
50 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Switching on the projector
Install the projection lens before switching on the
projector. (
page 43)
Remove the lens cover rst.
1) Connect the power plug to an outlet.
(AC 200 V - 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz)
2) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN
POWER> switch to turn on the power.
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
will light in red, and the projector will enter the
standby mode.
3) Press the power on < > button.
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
will light in green and the image will soon be
projected on the screen.
Attention
z
Using the projector while the lens cover is attached
may cause the device to heat up and result in a re.
Note
z
If the projector is switched on at about 0°C (32°F),
a warm-up period of approximately ve minutes
may be necessary until a projection is displayed.
The temperature indicator <TEMP> is lit during the
warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed,
the temperature indicator <TEMP> turns off and the
projection starts. Refer to “Managing the indicated
problems” (
page 142) for the indicator status.
z
If the operating environment temperature is low and
warm-up takes more than 5 minutes, the projector
will judge that a problem has occurred and the
power will automatically be set to stand-by. If this
happens, increase the operating environment
temperature 0°C (32°F) or higher, turn off the main
power, and then turn on the power again.
z
If the menu [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [STANDBY
MODE] (
page 106) is set in the [ECO] menu,
display will start approximately 10 seconds later
compared to when [NORMAL] is selected.
Making adjustments and
selections
It is recommended that images are projected
continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus
is adjusted.
4) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly
adjust the focus of the image.
(
page 52)
5) Set the projection method using
[PROJECTION METHOD] (
page 99)
and [COOLING CONDITION] (
page 100)
on the menu.
z
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
6) Press the input selection (<RGB1>,
<RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>,
<SDI 1/2>) buttons to select the input
signal. (
page 58)
(SDI input is only PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
7) Adjust the front and back, and sideway
tilt of the projector with the adjustable
feet. (
page 42)
8) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the
position of the image.(
page 52)
9) If the input signal is RGB, press the
<AUTO SETUP> button. (
page 59)
10)
Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust
the size of the image to match the
screen. (
page 52)
11)
Press the <FOCUS> button again to
adjust the focus.
12)
Press the <ZOOM> button again to
adjust the zoom and the size of the
image to match the screen.
7)
6) 9)
3)
3)
5)
5)
4)
9)
6)
8)
10) 12)
4) 11)
8) 10) 11) 12)
2)
1)
Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 51
Basic Operation
Switching off the projector
1) Press the power standby < > button.
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
(Or press the power standby <
>
button again)
z
Projection of the image will stop, and the power
indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the
projector lights in orange.
(The fan keeps running.)
3) Wait until the power indicator <ON
(G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector
lights in red (and the fan stops) for
approximately 170 seconds.
4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN
POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Note
z
Do not turn on the power and project images
immediately after turning the projector off.
Turning on the power while the lamp is still hot may
shorten the lamp life.
z
In about 75 seconds after the projector is switched
off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the
lamp indicators will not light up even if the power is
switched on. Even after 75 seconds, the lamp may
not light up if the power is switched on. After the
power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in
red, turn on the power again.
z
The projector consumes power even when the
power standby <
> button is pressed and the
power is switched off if the projector’s main
power is on.
Refer to “Power consumption” (
page 172) for the
power consumption.
1)
1)
3)
2)
2)
4)
Projecting
52 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Check the projection lens attachment (
page 43), external device connection (
page 44), power cord connection
(
page 48), switch on the power (
page 50) to start projecting. Select the video for projection, and adjust
appearance of the projected image.
Projecting
Select the input signal
Select an input signal.
1) Switch on the external devices.
z
Press the play button on an external device, such as a Blu-ray disc player.
2) Press the input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>)
buttons on the control panel or the remote control.
z
The image of the signal being input in the selected terminal is projected.
Attention
z
Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be
played back. Set [PICTURE]→[SYSTEM SELECTOR] (
page 70) on the menu.
z
Conrm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from
the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] (
page 72).
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift
If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is
correctly installed, adjust the focus, zoom, and shift.
■
On the projector
1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.
z
Pressing the button changes the setup screen in the order of “lens focus”, “lens zoom”, and “lens shift”.
2) Select each item and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust it.
■
Using the remote control
1) Press the lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons on the remote control.
z
<FOCUS> button: Adjusts focus.
z
<ZOOM> button: Adjusts zoom.
z
<SHIFT> button: Adjusts shift.
2) Select each item and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust it.
Note
z
Zoom adjust menu will not be displayed when the projection lens without the zoom function is attached.
z
Use the projection lens ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE50 with the lens position on the home position. (
page 53)
z
The adjustment can be performed faster by pressing and holding
󱚣󱚤
while adjusting the focus and shift.
z
It is recommended that images are projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
z
Only “lens focus” is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when
the projector is not focused and displayed characters are unreadable. (Factory default)
Displaying the color of “lens focus” varies depending on the setting of [OSD DESIGN] (
page 94) on the menu.
z
When the power is switched off during focus and shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the
next time the power is switched on. (
page 111)
z
When the main power is switched off during focus adjustment, lens calibration is performed automatically
during the next focus adjustment.
z
When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment, a lens calibration error screen will be displayed
during the next shift adjustment. Run [LENS CALIBRATION] (
page 111) from the menu.
z
When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer
to repair the unit.
Projecting
ENGLISH - 53
Basic Operation
Moving the lens to the home position
1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the remote
control for at least three seconds.
2) While the [HOME POSITION] menu is displayed (for approximately ve seconds),
press the <ENTER> button.
MENU
ENTER
LENS
HOME POSITION
EXECUTE
CANCEL
z
[PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu screen, and the lens returns to the home position.
Attention
z
The home position of the lens is the lens position when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is
being stored, and it is not the optical center of the screen.
Projecting
54 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)
Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range.
The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range. This is because the
movement of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts. Projection position can be adjusted with the optical
axis shift based on the standard projection position in the range shown in the following gures.
Projection lens
Model No.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE1, ET-D75LE2, ET-D75LE3, ET-D75LE4,
ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30,
ET-D75LE40
PT-DZ21KE
0.15 H 0.15 H
0.12 V0.12 V
0.44 V 0.44 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard projection
position
Standard screen
height (V)
0.2 H 0.2 H
0.12 V 0.12 V
0.55 V 0.55 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard projection
position
Standard screen
height (V)
PT-DS20KE
0.2 H 0.2 H
0.4 V 0.4 V
0.12 V0.12 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard projection
position
Standard screen
height (V)
0.3 H 0.3 H
0.1 V0.1 V
0.5 V 0.5 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard projection
position
Standard screen
height (V)
PT-DW17KE
0.2 H 0.2 H
0.2 V0.2 V
0.6 V 0.6 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard screen
height (V)
Standard projection
position
0.7 V 0.7 V
0.3 H 0.3 H
0.2 V0.2 V
Standard screen
width (H)
Standard projection
position
Standard screen
height (V)
Note
z
When the xed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE50) is attached, shift adjustment cannot be
performed.
Projecting
ENGLISH - 55
Basic Operation
Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced
■
Focus balance
z
Relationship between the tilt of the lens and the screen focus surface
When the projection lens is tilted in contrast with the image forming surface, tilting the front side (screen side)
of the projection lens downwards (in the direction of the dotted arrow line), the upper side of the screen focus
surface will tilt inwards and the lower side will tilt outwards.
3URMHFWLRQOHQV
,PDJHIRUPLQJVXUIDFH
6FUHHQIRFXVVXUIDFH
Figure 1 A diagram showing the effect of lens tilting
■
How to adjust the focus balance (adjustment by tilting the lens mounter)
When the entire screen surface is not uniform even if the lens focus has been adjusted, the lens mounter has
focus adjustment screws in 3 locations.
z
Lens mounter structure
The lens mount bracket can be moved back and forth by turning focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c).
Also, tightening the xed screws locks the lens mount bracket in place so it does not move.
Lens mount bracket Fixing screws
(Focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c) are adjusted with the lens attached.)
Figure 2 Front view diagram of the lens mounter (as seen from the screen side)
Projecting
56 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
When a projection lens with a large weight is installed, or when the projector is installed in an inclination, the lens
may tilt and the focus may become unbalanced. In these cases, refer to Figure 3 and the adjustment examples in
the table below, and perform adjustments through the following procedures.
z
Adjustment procedure
1) Press the <FOCUS> button or the <LENS> button on the remote control on the
control panel to display the focus adjustment menu.
2) Shift the focus of the entire screen once pressing
.
3) Press
to stop on any part of the screen to be the rst just focus point.
z
For the location where focus is shifted in this state, the just focus point is in the inner side of the screen.
4) Loosen the xed screws in the position relative to the location where the focus is
shifted the most (the location where the just focus point is shifted the most towards
the inner side in Step 2)) up to two rotations (see Figure 3).
Attention
z
Turn screws clockwise in 2 locations, or at least in 1 location to be adjusted.
5) Little by little, turn the focus adjustment screws corresponding to the locations in
the table below counter clockwise and stop where the image is in focus (
page 55).
z
If the screws are turned counter clockwise, the tilt of the lens will change (see Figure 1) by moving the lens
mount bracket of the lens mounter forward (screen side), and in the projected image on the screen, the
adjustment screws and the focus point in the opposite direction will move from the inner side of the screen
to the outside.
6) Press the <SHIFT> button on the remote control or the <LENS> button on the control
panel to display the shift adjustment menu and reset the screen position of the
projected image on the screen surface back to an optimal state.
7) Perform focus adjustment again near the center of the screen and if it is still not
enough, ne tune the amount of rotation of the adjustment screws.
8) When adjustments have been made, securely tighten the loosened xed screws.
9) Adjust the focus again using the remote control.
z
Tool used: Hex driver or allen wrench (diagonal 2.5 mm (0.1"))
z
The allen wrench is included with the projection lens ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8.
Adjustment location:
Location where the just focus point of the
screen is in the inner side of the screen
Figure 3 Relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws
Projecting
ENGLISH - 57
Basic Operation
When the just focus point of
the screen in V up is in the
inner side of the screen
When the just focus point of
the screen in V bottom is in
the inner side of the screen
When the just focus point of
the screen in H left is in the
inner side of the screen
When the just focus point
of the screen in H right is in
the inner side of the screen
(a) Rotate counter clockwise — — —
(b) — Rotate counter clockwise Rotate counter clockwise —
(c) — Rotate counter clockwise — Rotate counter clockwise
Remote control operation
58 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Remote control operation
Using the shutter function
If the projector is not used for a certain period of time
during the meeting intermission, for example, it is
possible to turn off the image temporarily.
button
1) Press the <SHUTTER> button on the
remote control or the control panel.
z
The image disappears.
2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
z
The image is displayed.
Note
z
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will
ash slowly in green while the shutter is closed
(
page 58).
z
You can set the speed of shutter opening/closing
via [SHUTTER SETTING] (
page 96).
Using the on-screen display
function
Turn off the on-screen display function (no display)
when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-
screen display, such as the menu or the input terminal
name.
button
1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the
remote control.
z
The on-screen display disappears.
2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
z
The on-screen display appears.
Note
z
If you press the <MENU> button on the control
panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen
indication is off, the on-screen display is turned on.
Switching the input
The input for projection can be switched.
button
Press the input selection (<RGB1>,
<RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>,
<SDI 1/2>) buttons on the control panel or
the remote control.
<RGB1> Switches to RGB1 input.
<RGB2> Switches to RGB2 input.
<DVI-D> Switches to DVI-D input.
<VIDEO> Switches to VIDEO input.
<HDMI> Switches to HDMI input.
<SDI 1/2>
*1
Switches to SDI 1 or SDI 2 input.
Switches to another input when one
input has already been chosen.
*1: SDI input is only PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE.
Remote control operation
ENGLISH - 59
Basic Operation
Using the STATUS function
You can display the status of the projector.
button
Press the <STATUS> button on the remote
control.
z
The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ENTER
MENU
RGB2
XGA60-A8
48.36kHz/ 60.03Hz
140h
68h/ ON/
69h/ ON/
0h/ OFF/
0h/ OFF/
27°C/ 80°F
33°C/ 92°F
33°C/ 92°F
1/4
SEND STATUS VIA E-MAIL
CHANGE EXIT
STATUS
INPUT
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL FREQUENCY
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
LAMP1
LAMP2
LAMP3
LAMP4
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.
AROUND LAMP TEMP.
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
Note
z
This can be displayed from the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [STATUS] (
page 109).
Using the Automatic setup
function
The automatic setup function can be used to
automatically adjust the resolution, clock phase, and
picture position when analog RGB signals consisting
of bitmap images such as computer signals are being
input, or to automatically adjust the picture position
when DVI-D/HDMI signals are being input. (Automatic
setup does not work for a movie format signal such
as an output signal of the blu-ray disc player. ) It is
recommended to supply images with a bright white
border at the rims and characters with high contrast
black and white when the system is in the automatic
adjustment mode.
Avoid supplying images that include halftones or
gradation, such as photographs and computer
graphics.
button
Press the <AUTO SETUP> button on the
remote control or the control panel.
z
[COMPLETE] is displayed when it has
completed without any problem.
Note
z
The CLOCK PHASE may shift even if it has
completed without any incident. In such cases,
adjust with the [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK
PHASE] (
page 74).
z
If an image with blurred edges or a dark image is
input, [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment
may not be performed properly even if [COMPLETE]
appears. In this case, adjust the settings in
the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [INPUT
RESOLUTION] (
page 78), [POSITION] → [CLOCK
PHASE] (
page 74), [SHIFT] (
page 72).
z
Adjust specic signals according to the [DISPLAY
OPTION] menu → [AUTO SETUP] (
page 91).
z
Automatic adjustment may not work depending on
the model of the computer.
z
Automatic adjustment may not work for a
synchronization signal of C-SY or SYNC ON
GREEN.
z
Images may be disrupted for a few seconds during
automatic adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
z
Adjustment is required for each input signal.
z
Automatic adjustment can be canceled by
pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic
adjustment operation.
z
Even for an RGB signal for which automatic setup
is possible, if automatic setup is performed while
moving images are being input, the adjustment may
not be performed properly. Even if [INCOMPLETE]
or [COMPLETE] appears, the adjustment may not
be performed properly.
Using the Function button
[DISABLE], [P IN P], [SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM
SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE],
[WAVEFORM MONITOR], [LENS MEMORY LOAD],
or [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] operations can be assigned
to the <FUNC> button on the remote control so that it
can be used as an easy shortcut button.
button
Press the <FUNC> button on the remote
control.
Note
z
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] can only be assigned in
PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE.
z
Assignment of the function is performed from the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION
BUTTON] (
page 110).
Remote control operation
60 - ENGLISH
Basic Operation
Displaying the internal test
pattern
The projector has eight types of internal test patterns
to check the condition of the set. To display test
patterns, perform the following steps.
button
1) Press the <TEST> button on the
remote control.
2) Press the
󱚣󱚤
button to select the test
pattern.
Note
z
Setting is also available from the [TEST PATTERN]
menu (
page 117).
z
Settings of position, size, and other factors will
not be reected in test patterns. Make sure to
display the input signal before performing various
adjustments.
Changing the picture aspect
ratio
You can toggle through aspect ratios to select the one
that is appropriate for the input signal.
button
Press the <ASPECT> button on the
remote control.
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[VID AUTO]
*1
[DEFAULT] [THROUGH] [16:9]
[AUTO]
*2
[HV FIT]
[V FIT] [H FIT] [4:3]
*1: Only for video signal and Y/C signal (NTSC) input
*2: Only for RGB (480i or 480p) signal input
Note
z
Some aspect ratios may not be available depending
on the input signal.
Refer to “[ASPECT]” (
page 72) for details.
Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 61
Settings
Menu navigation
Navigating through the menu
■
Operating procedure
button
1) Press the <MENU> button on the
remote control or control panel.
z
The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
(17(5
0$,10(18
3,&785(
326,7,21
$'9$1&('0(18
',63/$</$1*8$*(
'6(77,1*6
',63/$<237,21
352-(&7256(783
3,13
7(673$77(51
6,*1$//,67
6(&85,7<
1(7:25.
0(186(/(&7
68%0(18
2) Press

to select an item from the
main menu.
z
The selected item is highlighted in yellow.
(17(5
0$,10(18
3,&785(
326,7,21
$'9$1&('0(18
',63/$</$1*8$*(
'6(77,1*6
',63/$<237,21
352-(&7256(783
3,13
7(673$77(51
6,*1$//,67
6(&85,7<
1(7:25.
0(186(/(&7
68%0(18
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The sub-menu items of the selected main menu
are displayed.
(17(5
0(186(/(&7
68%0(18
326,7,21
6+,)7
$63(&7
=220
&/2&.3+$6(
'()$8/7
*(20(75< 2))
4) Press

to select a sub-menu, and
the
󱚣󱚤
buttons or the <ENTER>
button to change or adjust settings.
z
For some items, press the
󱚣󱚤
button to
display an individual adjustment screen with a
bar scale as shown in the following diagram.
&/2&.3+$6(
$'-867
Note
z
Pressing the <MENU> button when the menu
screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
z
Some items may not be adjusted or used for
certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used
are shown in gray characters, and they cannot
be selected. [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] and
[FRAME LOCK] may not be displayed depending
on signal input.
z
Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not
input.
z
Individual adjustment screen is cleared
automatically if no operation is performed for
approximately ve seconds.
z
For menu items, see “Main menu” (
page 62) and
“Sub-menu” (
pages 63 to 64).
z
The cursor color depends on the [OSD DESIGN]
(
page 94) settings on the menu. The selected item
is displayed with the yellow cursor by default.
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Menu navigation
62 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
To reset adjustment values to the
factory default
If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is
pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items
will be restored to the factory default settings.
button
Press the <DEFAULT> button on the
remote control.
&/2&.3+$6(
$'-867
Note
z
You cannot reset all the settings to the factory
default at a time.
z
To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu
item to the factory default at a time, perform
initialization from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
→ [INITIALIZE] (
page 114).
z
Some menu items cannot be reset by pressing the
<DEFAULT> button. Adjust each item manually.
z
The triangular mark under the bar scale in the
individual adjustment screen indicates the factory
default setting. The position of the triangular mark
varies by the selected input signals.
&XUUHQWVHWWLQJ
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen
changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
Main menu item Page
[PICTURE] 63
[POSITION] 63
[ADVANCED MENU] 63
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] 63
[3D SETTINGS]
*1
63
[DISPLAY OPTION] 64
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 64
[P IN P] 64
[TEST PATTERN] 64
[SIGNAL LIST] 64
[SECURITY] 64
[NETWORK] 64
*1: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 63
Settings
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is
displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the
sub-menu.
■
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[PICTURE MODE]
[STANDARD]
*1
65
[CONTRAST] [0] 66
[BRIGHTNESS] [0] 66
[COLOR] [2]
*1
66
[TINT] [–2] 66
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT] 66
[GAMMA] [DEFAULT] 68
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [OFF] 68
[SHARPNESS] [8] 68
[NOISE REDUCTION] [2] 69
[DYNAMIC IRIS] [2] 69
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [YP
B
P
R
]
*1
70
*1: Depends on the signal input.
Note
z
The factory default settings may vary depending on
the picture mode.
■
[POSITION]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[SHIFT] — 72
[ASPECT] [DEFAULT]
*1
72
[ZOOM] — 73
[CLOCK PHASE] [0] 74
[GEOMETRY]
*2
[OFF] 74
[KEYSTONE]
*3
— 76
*1: Depends on the signal input.
*2: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
*3: Only for PT-DW17KE
■
[ADVANCED MENU]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]
*1
77
[BLANKING] — 77
[INPUT RESOLUTION] — 78
[CLAMP POSITION] [24]
*1
78
[EDGE BLENDING] [OFF] 78
[FRAME RESPONSE] [NORMAL] 80
[FRAME LOCK]
*2
[OFF] 80
[RASTER POSITION] — 80
*1: Depends on the signal input.
*2: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
■
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (
page 81)
■
[3D SETTINGS]
*1
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] [SINGLE] 82
[3D SYNC SETTING] — 82
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] — 83
[3D INPUT FORMAT] [AUTO]
*2
84
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] [NORMAL] 84
[3D COLOR MATCHING]
[SHARED
2D/3D]
84
[3D PICTURE BALANCE] — 85
[DARK TIME SETTING] [1.5 ms] 85
[3D FRAME DELAY] [0 us] 86
[3D TEST MODE] [NORMAL] 86
[3D TEST PATTERN] — 86
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MESSAGE]
[ON] 87
[3D SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS]
— 87
*1: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
*2: Differs based on the selected input terminal.
Menu navigation
64 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
[DISPLAY OPTION]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[COLOR MATCHING] [OFF] 88
[LARGE SCREEN
CORRECTION]
[OFF] 89
[SCREEN SETTING]
*1
— 90
[AUTO SIGNAL] [OFF] 90
[AUTO SETUP] — 91
[RGB IN] — 92
[DVI-D IN] — 92
[HDMI IN] — 93
[SDI IN]
*1
— 93
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] — 94
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] 95
[STARTUP LOGO]
[DEFAULT
LOGO]
95
[UNIFORMITY] — 95
[SHUTTER SETTING] — 96
[FREEZE] — 96
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] [OFF] 96
[CUT OFF] — 98
*1: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
■
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] 99
[PROJECTION METHOD]
[FRONT/
FLOOR]
99
[COOLING CONDITION]
[FLOOR
SETTING]
100
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] [OFF] 100
[LAMP SELECT] [QUAD] 100
[LAMP RELAY] [OFF] 101
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] — 102
[STANDBY MODE] [NORMAL] 106
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] 106
[RS-232C] — 108
[STATUS] — 109
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] [DISABLE] 110
[REMOTE2 MODE] [DEFAULT] 110
[FUNCTION BUTTON] — 110
[DATE AND TIME] — 110
[LENS CALIBRATION] — 111
[LENS MEMORY] — 112
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] — 113
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] — 113
[INITIALIZE] — 114
[SERVICE PASSWORD] — 114
■
[P IN P]
Details (
page 115)
■
[TEST PATTERN]
Details (
page 117)
■
[SIGNAL LIST]
Details (
page 118)
■
[SECURITY]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] 121
[SECURITY PASSWORD
CHANGE]
— 121
[DISPLAY SETTING] [OFF] 122
[TEXT CHANGE] — 122
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] — 122
[CONTROL DEVICE
PASSWORD CHANGE]
— 124
■
[NETWORK]
Sub-menu item
Factory
default
Page
[NETWORK SETUP] ― 125
[NETWORK CONTROL] ― 125
[NETWORK STATUS] ― 125
Note
z
Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain
signal formats to be input to the projector.
The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used
are shown in gray characters, and they cannot be
selected.
z
Sub-menu items and factory default settings differ
depending on the selected input terminal.
[PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 65
Settings
Select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and
select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable
for the image source and the environment in which
the projector is used.
1) Press

to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
.
z
The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [PICTURE
MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[STANDARD]
[CINEMA] [NATURAL]
[USER]
[DICOM
SIM.]
[GRAPHIC] [DYNAMIC]
[STANDARD]
The picture becomes suitable for
moving images in general.
[CINEMA]
The picture becomes suitable for
movie sources.
[NATURAL] The picture is sRGB compliant.
[DICOM SIM.]
The picture becomes similar to
that of DICOM Part14 Grayscale
Standard.
[DYNAMIC]
The light output is maximized for use
in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC]
The picture becomes suitable for
input from to the personal computer.
[USER] Set any desired picture mode.
Note
z
The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for
still image input signals and [STANDARD] for movie
based input signals.
z
DICOM is an abbreviation for “Digital Imaging and
Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for
medical imaging devices. Although the DICOM
name is used, the projector is not a medical device,
and should not be used for purposes such as
diagnosis of display images.
z
Press the <ENTER> button when each [PICTURE
MODE] is selected to save as a specied value
when a new signal is input. The data of all items
except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in the [PICTURE]
menu is saved.
z
In the factory default settings, [USER] is set
to images that comply with the ITU-R BT.709
standard.
■
To change the [USER] name
4) Select [USER] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select [PICTURE MODE
NAME CHANGE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE]
screen is displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the character,
and press the <ENTER> button to
enter the character.
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The picture mode name is changed.
[PICTURE] menu
[PICTURE] menu
66 - ENGLISH
Settings
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1) Press

to select [CONTRAST].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen
is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range
Press
󱚤
.
Brightens the screen
and makes the color
of image deeper.
Maximum
value +31
Press
󱚣
.
Darkens the screen
and makes the color
of image lighter.
Minimum
value –31
Attention
z
Adjust [BRIGHTNESS] rst when you need to
adjust the black level.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1) Press

to select [BRIGHTNESS].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range
Press
󱚤
.
Increases the
brightness of the
dark (black) parts of
the screen.
Maximum
value +31
Press
󱚣
.
Reduces the
brightness of the
dark (black) parts of
the screen.
Minimum
value –31
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1) Press

to select [COLOR].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is
displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range
Press
󱚤
. Deepens colors.
Maximum
value +31
Press
󱚣
. Weakens colors.
Minimum
value –31
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1) Press

to select [TINT].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is
displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range
Press
󱚤
.
Adjusts skin tone
toward greenish color.
Maximum
value +31
Press
󱚣
.
Adjusts skin tone
toward reddish purple.
Minimum
value –31
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white
areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
1) Press

to select [COLOR
TEMPERATURE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual
adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [COLOR
TEMPERATURE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
*1
[USER1] [USER2]
[9300K] [3200K]
(100 K increments)
*1: When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [USER] or [DICOM
SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.
Note
z
When the [COLOR MATCHING] (
page 88)
adjustment is set to any setting other than [OFF],
the color temperature setting is xed to [USER1].
z
The color temperature numerical values are
guidelines.
[PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 67
Settings
■
To adjust desired white balance
4) Select [USER1] or [USER2] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select [WHITE
BALANCE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
8) Press

to select [WHITE BALANCE
HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].
9) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the
[WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
10)
Press

to select [RED], [GREEN],
and [BLUE].
11)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Item Operation
Adjustment
Range
[RED]
Press
󱚤
.
Deepens
red.
Maximum
value
High: 255
Low: 127
Minimum
value
High: 0
Low: –127
Default
High: 255
Low: 0
Press
󱚣
.
Weakens
red.
[GREEN]
Press
󱚤
.
Deepens
green.
Press
󱚣
.
Weakens
green.
[BLUE]
Press
󱚤
.
Deepens
blue.
Press
󱚣
.
Weakens
blue.
■
To adjust desired white balance
based on existing color
temperature settings
4) Select a setting other than [DEFAULT],
[USER1], or [USER2] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.
6) Press

to select [USER1] or
[USER2].
z
The status of the color temperature changed is
saved to the selected item.
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The conrmation screen is displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.
z
If you press
󱚣󱚤
to select [CANCEL] and then
press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be
overwritten.
z
The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is
displayed.
9)
Press

to select [RED], [GREEN],
and [BLUE].
10) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Note
z
Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly.
All colors will not be displayed properly unless
adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the
<DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return
the setting for the selected item only to the factory
default setting.
z
When color temperature has been changed, the
colors before and after the change will differ slightly.
■
To change the name of [USER1]
or [USER2]
4) Select [USER1] or [USER2] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select [COLOR
TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME
CHANGE] screen is displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the character,
and press the <ENTER> button to
enter the character.
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
z
When a name is changed, display of [USER1] and
[USER2] on the menu is also changed.
[PICTURE] menu
68 - ENGLISH
Settings
[GAMMA]
Switch gamma mode.
1) Press

to select [GAMMA].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is
displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [GAMMA].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[DEFAULT]*
1
[USER1]
[2.8] [USER2]
[DICOM SIM.]
(0.1 increments)
[1.0]
[2.0] [1.8]
*1: When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [USER], or
[DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.
Note
z
DICOM is an abbreviation for “Digital Imaging and
Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for
medical imaging devices. Although the DICOM
name is used, the projector is not a medical device,
and should not be used for purposes such as
diagnosis of display images.
■
To change the name of [USER1]
or [USER2]
4) Select [USER1] or [USER2] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is
displayed.
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the character,
and press the <ENTER> button to
enter the character.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The Select Gamma name is changed.
Note
z
When a name is changed, display of [USER1] and
[USER2] on the menu is also changed.
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
You can correct the image to the optimal vividness
even if it is projected under a bright light.
1) Press

to select [SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual
adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] (No
correction)
[1] (Low)
[3] (High) [2] (Medium)
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1) Press

to select [SHARPNESS].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment
Adjustment
range
Press
󱚤
.
Contours become
sharper.
0 - 15
Press
󱚣
.
Contours become
softer.
Note
z
If you press
󱚤
while the adjustment value is [15],
the value will become [0]. If you press
󱚣
while the
adjustment value is [0], the value will become [15].
[PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 69
Settings
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is
degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1) Press

to select [NOISE
REDUCTION].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual
adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [NOISE
REDUCTION].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[1] (Low) [2] (Medium)
[OFF] (No
correction)
[3] (High)
Attention
z
When this is set for an input signal with less noise,
the image may look different from what it originally
was. In such case, set it to [OFF].
[DYNAMIC IRIS]
Aperture correction and signal compensation are
performed automatically based on the image to result
in an image of optimum contrast.
1) Press

to select [DYNAMIC IRIS].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [DYNAMIC IRIS] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [DYNAMIC
IRIS].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] (No
correction)
[1] (Small)
[2]
(Medium)
[USER] [3] (Large)
■
To adjust desired correction
amount
4) Select [USER] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [DYNAMIC IRIS] screen is displayed.
6) Press

to select the item you want
to adjust, and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the
correction amount.
z
Auto Iris (Automatic adjustment of
aperture)
[OFF] (no automatic
adjustment)
[1] (Small)
[255] (Large)
[254] (Medium) [2] (Medium)
(Increments of 1)
z
Manual Iris (Fixed adjustment of
aperture)
[OFF] (no xed
aperture)
[1] (Small)
[255] (Large)
[254] (Medium) [2] (Medium)
(Increments of 1)
z
Dynamic Gamma (adjustment of signal
compensation)
[OFF] (no automatic
compensation)
[1] (Small)
[3] (Large) [2] (Medium)
Note
z
When [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set [3], the contrast
will be maximized.
z
Luminance control and iris operate simultaneously,
but the iris will not operate if left fully open while
brightness is being measured.
[PICTURE] menu
70 - ENGLISH
Settings
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal,
but you can set the system method manually when
an unstable signal is input. Set the system method
matching the input signal.
1) Press

to select [SYSTEM
SELECTOR].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press

to select a system format.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
■
When using <VIDEO IN> terminal,
<G/Y>/<B/P
B
/C> terminals
Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M],
[PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].
Attention
z
Set it to [AUTO] normally.
z
Switch the setting to the signal method for the TV
used.
Note
z
Setting [AUTO] will automatically select [NTSC],
[NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or
[PAL60].
■
When using <RGB 1 IN> terminal,
<RGB 2 IN> terminal
z
Only during 480i, 576i, or 576p signal
input
Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
z
Only during VGA60 or 480p signal input
Select [VGA60], [480p YC
B
C
R
], or [480p RGB].
z
When using other movie based input
signals
Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
Note
z
Refer to “List of compatible signals” (
page 167) for
compatible signals.
■
When using <DVI-D IN> terminal
z
Only during 480p or 576p signal input
Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
z
When using other movie based input
signals
Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
Note
z
Refer to List of compatible signals (
page 167) for
compatible signals.
z
This may not function properly for some external
devices that are connected.
■
When using the <HDMI IN>
terminal
z
Only during 480p or 576p signal input
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YC
B
C
R
].
z
When using other movie based input
signals
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP
B
P
R
].
Note
z
Refer to List of compatible signals (
page 167) for
compatible signals.
z
This may not function properly for some external
devices that are connected.
[PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 71
Settings
■
When using <SDI IN 1> terminal,
<SDI IN 2> terminal (PT-DZ21KE
and PT-DS20KE only)
z
Single link
During SDI1 input, select [AUTO], [480i YC
B
C
R
], [576i
YC
B
C
R
], [720/50p YP
B
P
R
], [720/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1035/60i
YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24sF YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/25p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/30p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50i
YP
B
P
R
], [1080/60i YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50p YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p RGB], [1080/24sF
RGB], [1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i
RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].
During SDI2 input, select [AUTO], [480i YC
B
C
R
], [576i
YC
B
C
R
], [720/50p YP
B
P
R
], [720/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1035/60i
YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24sF YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/25p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/30p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50i
YP
B
P
R
], or [1080/60i YP
B
P
R
].
z
Dual link
Select [AUTO], [1080/24p RGB], [2K/24p RGB],
[2K/24p XYZ], [1080/24sF RGB], [2K/24sF RGB],
[2K/24sF XYZ], [1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB],
[1080/50i RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].
Note
z
Refer to “List of compatible signals” (
page 167) for
compatible signals.
z
This may not function properly for some external
devices that are connected.
Making sRGB compliant
images
sRGB is color reproduction international standard
IEC61966-2-1, set by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission).
Set according to the following steps to reproduce
more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.
1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] adjustment to
[OFF].
z
Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] (
page 88).
2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.
z
Refer to “[PICTURE] menu” (
page 65).
3) Press

to select [PICTURE MODE].
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to set [NATURAL].
5) Press

to select [COLOR].
6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on
the remote control to set the factory
default values.
7) Set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE],
and [GAMMA] to the factory default
values by following Steps 5) to 6).
Note
z
sRGB is supported only when RGB signals are
input.
[POSITION] menu
72 - ENGLISH
Settings
Select [POSITION] from the main menu, and
select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[SHIFT]
You can move the image position vertically or
horizontally if the image position projected on the
screen is shifted even when the relative position of the
projector and the screen is installed correctly.
1) Press

to select [SHIFT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the position.
■
For vertical (up and down)
adjustment
Operation Adjustment
Press
.
The picture
position moves
up.
Press
.
The picture
position moves
down.
■
For horizontal (right and left)
adjustment
Operation Adjustment
Press
󱚤
.
The picture
position moves to
the right.
Press
󱚣
.
The picture
position moves to
the left.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range
selected in [SCREEN SETTING]. Set [SCREEN
SETTING] rst.(
page 90)
1) Press

to select [ASPECT].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is
displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [ASPECT].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[VID AUTO]
*1
[DEFAULT] [THROUGH]
[AUTO]
*2
[HV FIT] [16:9]
[V FIT] [H FIT] [4:3]
*1: For video signals and Y/C signals (NTSC) only
*2: For RGB (480i or 480p) signal input only
■
[DEFAULT]
Pictures are displayed without changing the aspect
ratio of the input signals.
■
[VID AUTO]
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded
in the image signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3
and 16:9. This function is effective for NTSC signals.
■
[AUTO]
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded
in the image signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between
4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480i/480p
signals.
■
[THROUGH]
Pictures are displayed without changing the resolution
of the input signals.
[POSITION] menu
[POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 73
Settings
■
[16:9]
When standard signals
*1
are input, the pictures are
displayed with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9.
When wide-screen signals
*2
are input, the pictures are
displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
■
[4:3]
When standard signals
*1
are input, the pictures are
displayed without changing the aspect ratio. When
wide-screen signals
*2
are input and [4:3] is selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], the pictures are displayed with
the aspect ratio changed to 4:3. If [4:3] is not selected
with [SCREEN FORMAT], the pictures are reduced so
that they will be in the 4:3 screen without changing the
input aspect ratio.
■
[H FIT]
The display will use the full width of the screen range
selected with [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals
have a vertical aspect ratio that is larger than the
screen aspect selected with [SCREEN FORMAT],
pictures will be displayed with their top and bottom
areas cut off.
■
[V FIT]
The display will use the full height of the screen range
selected with [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals
have a horizontal aspect ratio that is larger than the
screen aspect selected with [SCREEN FORMAT],
pictures will be displayed with their both sides cut off.
■
[HV FIT]
The pictures are displayed in the full screen range
selected with [SCREEN FORMAT]. If the aspect
ratios of the input signals and screen range differ,
conversion to the screen aspect set with [SCREEN
FORMAT] is performed and then the pictures are
displayed.
*1: Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3
or 5:4.
*2: Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio
of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
z
Some size modes are not available for certain types
of input signals. [DEFAULT] cannot be selected for
NTSC signals.
z
If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect
ratio for the input signals is selected, the pictures
will appear differently from the originals. Be careful
of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
z
If using this projector in places such as cafes
or hotels to display programs for a commercial
purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom
function to change the screen pictures may be an
infringement of the rights of the original copyright
owner for that program under copyright protection
laws. Take care when using a function of the
projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment, zoom
function, etc.
z
If conventional (normal) 4:3 pictures which are
not wide-screen pictures are displayed on a wide
screen, the edges of the pictures may not be visible
or they may become distorted. Such pictures
should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in
the original format intended by the creator of the
pictures.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the size of the projected image.
1) Press

to select [ZOOM].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select [VERTICAL] or
[HORIZONTAL], then press
󱚣󱚤
to
adjust it.
■
When [ASPECT] is set to
[DEFAULT]
1) Press

to select [MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [MODE].
[INTERNAL]
Enlarge the size within the aspect
range set in [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL]
Enlarges the size of the pictures
using the whole of the display area
selected with [SCREEN FORMAT].
3) Press

to select [INTERLOCKED].
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [INTERLOCKED].
[OFF]
Set the [VERTICAL] and
[HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Use [BOTH] to set zoom ratio.
Horizontal and vertical can be
expanded by units of 1.0 time.
Note
z
When [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] is
not displayed.
z
When anything but [DEFAULT] is selected for
[ASPECT], [MODE] is not displayed.
[POSITION] menu
74 - ENGLISH
Settings
[CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when
there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press

to select [CLOCK PHASE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
or the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
z
Adjustment value will change between [0] and
[31]. Adjust so that the amount of interference is
at a minimum.
Note
z
Certain signals may not be adjustable.
z
Optimal value may not be achieved if the output
from the input computer is unstable.
z
Optimal value may not be achieved when there is a
shift in the total dot numbers.
z
[CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when a
signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the
<RGB 2 IN> terminal.
z
[CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital
signal is input.
z
If you press
󱚤
while the adjustment value is [31],
the value will become [0]. If you press
󱚣
while the
adjustment value is [0], the value will become [31].
[GEOMETRY]
(PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only)
Correct various types of distortion in a projected
image.
Unique image processing technology enables
projection of a square image on a special screen
shape.
1) Press

to select [GEOMETRY].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [GEOMETRY]
setting.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [KEYSTONE]
[PC] [CURVED]
[OFF]
Does not perform geometric
adjustment.
[KEYSTONE]
Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in
the projected image.
[CURVED]
Adjusts any curved distortion in the
projected image.
[PC]
*1
Uses the computer to perform
geometric adjustment.
*1: Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control
geometric adjustment. Consult your dealer.
3) Select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED]
in Step 2), and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or
[GEOMETRY:CURVED] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select the item you want
to adjust, and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the
correction amount.
z
The projected image can be corrected.
■
[KEYSTONE]
z
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
z
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 75
Settings
z
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
z
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range
in vertical direction.
z
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range
in horizontal direction.
■
[CURVED]
z
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
z
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
z
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
z
[VERTICAL ARC]
z
[HORIZONTAL ARC]
z
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
z
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Note
z
The menu or logo may extend beyond the edge of
the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.
z
If [EDGE BLENDING] (
page 78) adjustment and
[GEOMETRY] are used together, correct edge
blending adjustment may not be possible in certain
environments.
z
An optional upgrade kit (Model No.: ET-UK20)
can be used to expand the correctable range. To
purchase the product, consult your dealer.
[POSITION] menu
76 - ENGLISH
Settings
[KEYSTONE]
(PT-DW17KE only)
You can correct the trapezoidal distortion that occurs
when the projector is installed tilted or when the
screen is tilted.
1) Press

to select [KEYSTONE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press

to select the item to adjust.
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
■
[KEYSTONE]
■
[SUB KEYSTONE]
■
[LINEARITY]
Note
z
The menu or logo may run off the screen
when various adjustments are performed with
[KEYSTONE].
z
Various adjustments with [KEYSTONE] are
possible to correct up to ±40° for the tilt in vertical
direction. However, the picture quality will degrade
and it will get harder to focus with more correction.
Install the projector so the correction will be as
small as possible. (±22° when using projection lens
ET-D75LE5/ET-D75LE50, or ±28° when using the
ET-D75LE6.)
z
Image size will also change when [KEYSTONE] is
used to perform adjustments.
z
Trapezoidal distortion may occur depending on the
lens shift position.
z
Aspect ratio of the image size may shift depending
on the correction or lens zoom value.
[ADVANCED MENU]
ENGLISH - 77
Settings
Select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main
menu, and select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance
the picture quality by performing the cinema
processing when the PAL (or the SECAM) 576i signal,
the NTSC 480i, 1080/50i, and 1080/60i signals are
input.
1) Press

to select [DIGITAL CINEMA
REALITY].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DIGITAL CINEMA
REALITY].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[AUTO] [OFF]
[25p FIXED] (when a 576i or 1080/50i signal is input)
[30p FIXED] (when a 480i or 1080/60i signal is input)
[AUTO]
Performs automatic detection and
cinema processing.
(Factory default)
[OFF] Unforced cinema processing.
[25p FIXED]
Forced cinema processing (2:2
pulldown) is performed when a 576i
or 1080/50i signal is input.
[30p FIXED]
Forced cinema processing (2:2
pulldown) is performed when a 480i
or 1080/60i signal is input.
Note
z
In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] mode, the picture
quality will degrade when a signal other than the
2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p FIXED].
(Vertical resolution will degrade.)
[BLANKING]
The blanking width is adjusted when there are noise
at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly
running out from the screen when an image from the
VCR or other devices are projected.
1) Press

to select [BLANKING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select the adjustment
item.
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the blanking.
z
Changes within the following range.
For PT-DZ21KE
Left to right: 0 to 959, Top to bottom: 0 to 599
For PT-DS20KE
Left to right: 0 to 699, Top to bottom: 0 to 524
For PT-DW17KE
Left to right: 0 to 682, Top to bottom: 0 to 383
When correcting blanking at the top of the screen [UPPER]
Press
󱚣
to move the
blanking zone upward.
Press
󱚤
to move the
blanking zone downward.
When correcting blanking at the bottom of the screen [LOWER]
Press
󱚤
to move the
blanking zone upward.
Press
󱚣
to move the
blanking zone downward.
When correcting blanking at the left of the screen [LEFT]
Press
󱚤
to move the
blanking zone to the right.
Press
󱚣
to move the
blanking zone to the left.
When correcting blanking at the right of the screen [RIGHT]
Press
󱚣
to move the
blanking zone to the right.
Press
󱚤
to move the
blanking zone to the left.
For [CUSTOM MASKING]
*1
Set from a PC to perform blanking in any shape.
*1: To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, an optional
upgrade kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase
the product, consult your dealer.
[ADVANCED MENU]
[ADVANCED MENU]
78 - ENGLISH
Settings
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when
there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press

to select [INPUT
RESOLUTION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select [TOTAL DOTS],
[DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or
[DISPLAY LINES], and press
󱚣󱚤
to
adjust it.
z
Values corresponding to the input signal are
displayed automatically for each item. Change
the displayed values and adjust to the optimal
point viewing the screen when there is a vertical
banding or missing in the screen.
Note
z
Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur
with all white signal input.
z
The image may be disrupted while performing the
adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
z
[INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when
a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the
<RGB 2 IN> terminal.
z
Certain signals may not be adjustable.
[CLAMP POSITION]
You can adjust the optimal point when the black part
of the image is blunt or it has turned green.
1) Press

to select [CLAMP
POSITION].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
z
Adjust the level to a value from [1] to [255].
z
Optimal value of clamp position adjustment
When the black part is blunt:
The point where bluntness of the black part
improves the most is the optimal value.
When the black part is green:
The point where the green part becomes black,
and the bluntness has improved is the optimal
value.
Note
z
[CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a
signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the
<RGB 2 IN> terminal.
z
Certain signals may not be adjustable.
[EDGE BLENDING]
The edge blending function allows multiple projector
images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the
inclination of the brightness at the overlapped area.
1) Press

to select [EDGE
BLENDING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [EDGE
BLENDING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON] [USER]
[OFF]
Sets the edge blending function to
off.
[ON]
Use the setting value of the internal
distortion of the set for the inclination
of the edge blending area.
[USER]
Use the user-setting value for the
inclination of the edge blending area.
(Conguration/registration requires
separate software. Consult your
dealer.)
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to specify the location to be
corrected.
z
When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON].
z
When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON].
z
When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON].
z
When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [ON]and [OFF].
6) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust correction width
and starting point.
[ADVANCED MENU]
ENGLISH - 79
Settings
■
To display the adjustment marker
7) Press

to select [MARKER].
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [ON].
z
A marker for image position adjustment is
displayed. The position where the red and
green lines overlap for the sets to join will be
the optimal point.
Make sure to set the correction width for the
sets to join as the same value. Optimal joining
is not possible with the sets with different
correction widths.
The optimal point is the point where this line overlaps.
Green line
Red line
9) Press

to select [BRIGHT ADJUST].
10)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHT ADJUST] screen is displayed.
z
When [AUTO TESTPATTERN] in the [EDGE
BLENDING] screen is set to [ON], completely
black test patterns will appear when the
[BRIGHT ADJUST] screen is displayed.
11)
Press

to select [BRIGHT INSIDE].
12)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHT INSIDE] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
z
When [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED],
[GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted.
13)
Press

to select an item, and
press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the setting.
z
Once the adjustment is completed, press the
<MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHT
ADJUST] screen.
14)
Press

to select [UPPER],
[LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in
[OUTSIDE AREA].
15)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to set the region (width) of
the [BRIGHT INSIDE] adjustment.
16)
Press

to select [BRIGHT
OUTSIDE].
17)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHT OUTSIDE] individual adjustment
screen is displayed.
z
When [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED],
[GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted.
18)
Press

to select an item, and
press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the setting.
[OUTSIDE AREA] (Right)
Projection range
Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)
[MARKER] (Red)
Edge blending [START]
(Right)
[MARKER] (Green))
[BRIGHT OUTSIDE]
[BRIGHT INSIDE]
Note
z
The [BRIGHT ADJUST] function makes it harder
to notice the black level of the part of the image
overlapping getting brighter when multiple screens
are set using [EDGE BLENDING]. The optimal
point of the correction is set by adjusting [BRIGHT
INSIDE] so the black level of the overlapping image
area will be the same level as the non-overlapping
area.
If the bordering part of the part where the image
is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets
brighter after adjusting [BRIGHT INSIDE], adjust
the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust
[BRIGHT OUTSIDE] when the width adjustment
makes only the border area darker.
z
The joining part may look discontinuous depending
on the position you are looking from when a screen
with high gain or rear screen is used.
z
When horizontal and vertical edge blending are
used simultaneously, adjust [BRIGHT BLENDING]
before the Step 11) adjustment.
z
To use either horizontal or vertical edge blending
only, set all values of [BRIGHT BLENDING] to 0.
z
The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] settings change in
conjunction with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] in
[COLOR MATCHING].
[ADVANCED MENU]
80 - ENGLISH
Settings
[FRAME RESPONSE]
Image processing is simplied when 1080/60i,
1080/50i, and 1080/24sF signals are input to reduce
image frame delay.
1) Press

to select [FRAME
RESPONSE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [FRAME
RESPONSE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NORMAL] [FAST]
[NORMAL] Standard setting.
[FAST]
Set when the picture is displayed
later than sound.
Note
z
When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST],
picture quality deteriorates. Noise reduction, digital
cinema quality and P IN P functions also cannot be
used.
z
When [NOISE REDUCTION] is set to other than
[OFF], [FRAME RESPONSE] cannot be set.
[FRAME LOCK]
(PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only)
Set this to view 3D display when the scanning
frequency of the signal is 25 Hz, 50 Hz, and 100 Hz.
1) Press

to select [FRAME LOCK].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [FRAME LOCK].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF] Decreases the ickering.
[ON]
Synchronizes the display to the
scanning frequency of the input
signal.
Note
z
[FRAME LOCK] is not displayed when the scanning
frequency of the signal other than above is input or
2D images are displayed.
z
The screen may icker when the [FRAME LOCK] is
set to [ON].
z
The display may look discontinuous when the
[FRAME LOCK] is set to [OFF].
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within
the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not
using the whole display area.
1) Press

to select [RASTER
POSITION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the position.
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
ENGLISH - 81
Settings
Select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main
menu, and display the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
Press

to select a language, and press the
<ENTER> button to set.
Changing the display
language
You can select the language of the on-screen display.
ENTER
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SELECT
SET
z
Various menus, settings, adjustment screens,
control button names, etc., are displayed in the
selected language.
z
The language can be changed to English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese,
Chinese, Russian, and Korean.
Note
z
The on-screen display language of the projector is
set to English by default. (Factory default)
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
82 - ENGLISH
Settings
[3D SETTINGS] menu
(PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
Select [3D SETTINGS] from the main menu, and
select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
Set a picture display method for use during 3D signal
input as necessary for the 3D system in use.
1) Press

to select [3D SYSTEM
SETTING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D SYSTEM
SETTING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[SINGLE]
[DUAL (LEFT)] [DUAL (RIGHT)]
[SINGLE]
During 3D signal input, sequential
frames of images for the right eye
and images for the left eye are
alternately displayed.
[DUAL
(LEFT)]
Only images for the left eye are
displayed during 3D signal input.
[DUAL
(RIGHT)]
Only images for the right eye are
displayed during 3D signal input.
Note
z
When 2D images are input, 2D images are
displayed regardless of [3D SYSTEM SETTING]
settings.
[3D SYNC SETTING]
Set the way in which the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT>
terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal will be
used.
Attention
z
Before connecting the external device with the
cables to the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and
the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal, nish the [3D
SYNC MODE] setting and conrm that the device is
turned off.
z
Changing [3D SYNC MODE] while connecting the
cables may result in malfunctions of the projector or
external devices connected.
1) Press

to select [3D SYNC
SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The precaution message related to 3D SYNC
setting is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3D SYNC SETTING] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select [3D SYNC MODE].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D SYNC MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [1]
[11] [2]
[10] [3]
[9] [4]
[8] [5]
[7] [6]
z
Items set in [3D SYNC1]
[OFF] Not used.
[1] 3D trigger output
[2] 3D trigger output
[3] Stereo synch input
[4] Stereo synch input
[5] Stereo synch input
[6] Frame synch input
[7] Frame synch input
[8] Frame synch input
[9] 3D trigger output
[10] Stereo synch output
[11] 3D IR TRANSMITTER (+) output
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
ENGLISH - 83
Settings
z
Items set in [3D SYNC2]
[OFF] Not used.
[1] Stereo synch output
[2] 3D trigger output
[3] Through 3D SYNC1
[4] Stereo synch output
[5] 3D trigger output
[6] Through 3D SYNC1
[7] Stereo synch output
[8] 3D trigger output
[9] Frame synch output
[10] Frame synch output
[11] 3D IR TRANSMITTER (–) output
6) If you selected [1], [4], [7], or [10],
press

to select [STEREO SYNC
OUTPUT DELAY] and press
󱚣󱚤
to set
the amount of delay output.
z
Values in the following range change by units of
10 us.
0 us to 25 000 us
z
To synchronize multiple projectors to display 3D
images, use a frame synch input and output.
Select [9] or [10] for the rst projector.
Select [6], [7], or [8] for the second and
subsequent projectors.
z
Stereo synch is a Duty 50% signal at High
during Left and at Low during Right.
z
An “H” is output to the 3D images display and
an “L” is output to the 2D image display from
the terminal for which 3D trigger output is
selected.
Note
z
[11] of [3D SYNC SETTING] is the setting when
the 3D IR Transmitter TY-3DTRW (Panasonic) is
used with this projector. As for connecting method,
consult your dealer.
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
Set to input and use simultaneous 3D images signals.
1) Press

to select [3D SIMUL INPUT
SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select [LEFT:RGB1
RIGHT:RGB2], [LEFT:HDMI
RIGHT:DVI-D], or [LEFT:SDI1
RIGHT:SDI2].
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the setting.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [AUTO]
[OFF] Cannot use 3D simultaneous.
[AUTO] Displays simultaneous 3D images.
Note
z
When set to [AUTO], 3D images are displayed
when the same 3D compatible signals are entered
to each input. However, the P IN P status during P
IN P is maintained.
z
This may not function properly for some external
devices that are connected.
z
Certain signals may not function properly.
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
84 - ENGLISH
Settings
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
Set the 3D format for the image signals being input.
Set a 3D format that matches the input signal.
1) Press

to select [3D INPUT
FORMAT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3D INPUT FORMAT] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select a 3D format.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
[AUTO]
*1
Automatically detects 3D format of
input image signals and displays
images.
[NATIVE]
Forcibly displays images in 2D
regardless of input image signals.
[SIMULTANEOUS]
*2
Forcibly displays 3D images in
simultaneous format regardless of
input image signals.
[SIDE BY
SIDE]
Forcibly displays 3D images in side
by side format regardless of input
image signals.
[TOP AND
BOTTOM]
Forcibly displays 3D images in top
and bottom format regardless of
input image signals.
[LINE BY
LINE]
*3
Forcibly displays 3D images in line
by line format regardless of input
image signals.
[FRAME
SEQUENTIAL]
*4
Forcibly displays 3D images in frame
sequential format regardless of input
image signals.
*1: During DVI-D or HDMI input only
*2: During 3G-SDI level B input only
*3: During signals other than interlaced signals are input
*4: During RGB1, RGB2, DVI-D, and HDMI input only
Note
z
When set to [AUTO], [SIMULTANEOUS], [SIDE BY
SIDE], [TOP AND BOTTOM], [LINE BY LINE], or
[FRAME SEQUENTIAL], images are not displayed
in 3D as per the [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING].
However, this only occurs in [AUTO] when 3D
format can be recognized.
z
This may not function properly for some external
devices that are connected.
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Flips the timing of the switch between the left and
right of an image to display. Change the setting if the
3D images you see appear strange.
1) Press

to select [LEFT/RIGHT
SWAP].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LEFT/RIGHT
SWAP].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NORMAL] [SWAPPED]
[NORMAL]
If the 3D images are displayed
correctly, do not change the
[NORMAL] settings.
[SWAPPED]
Select when left and right 3D
images are swapped to be
displayed.
Note
z
This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is
set to any setting other than [SINGLE].
[3D COLOR MATCHING]
Switches the color matching correction data applied to
the displayed image.
1) Press

to select [3D COLOR
MATCHING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D COLOR
MATCHING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[SHARED 2D/3D] [SEPARATE 2D/3D]
[SHARED
2D/3D]
2D signals and 3D signals use the
same correction data.
[SEPARATE
2D/3D]
2D signals and 3D signals use
different correction data.
Note
z
Keep the signal you want to adjust input when you
switch the [COLOR MATCHING] (
page 88) setting.
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
ENGLISH - 85
Settings
[3D PICTURE BALANCE]
Correct a shift when the brightness or color differ in
the right eye and left eye images.
1) Press

to select [3D PICTURE
BALANCE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select an item, and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the setting.
z
Correct the setting value parts of the right eye
image based on the left eye image.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the
colors.
[WHITE
BALANCE HIGH
RED]
Adjusts the high red white
balance.
[WHITE
BALANCE HIGH
GREEN]
Adjusts the high green white
balance.
[WHITE
BALANCE HIGH
BLUE]
Adjusts the high blue white
balance.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black)
part of the projected image.
[WHITE
BALANCE LOW
RED]
Adjusts the low red white balance.
[WHITE
BALANCE LOW
GREEN]
Adjusts the low green white
balance.
[WHITE
BALANCE LOW
BLUE]
Adjusts the low blue white
balance.
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation
of the projected image.
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the
projected image.
[CLOCK
PHASE]
Adjust when the screen ickers or
outline blurs.
Note
z
[CLOCK PHASE] settings go are enabled at
simultaneous input of RGB1 and RGB2 to adjust
the right eye image.
z
This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is
set to any setting other than [SINGLE].
z
This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is
displayed.
z
This is disabled when [3D TEST MODE] is set to
any setting other than [NORMAL] and [SIDE BY
SIDE].
■
To display [3D WAVEFORM
MONITOR]
The left eye and right eye images are divided and
displayed in a waveform on the left and right.
4) Select [3D WAVEFORM MONITOR] in
Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D WAVEFORM
MONITOR].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF]
The 3D waveform monitor is not
displayed.
[ON]
The 3D waveform monitor is
displayed.
Note
z
The 3D waveform monitor is displayed only when
the [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
z
The normal waveform monitor cannot be displayed
in 3D images.
[DARK TIME SETTING]
Set the black display period to be displayed between
the right eye image and the left eye image as
necessary for the 3D system used.
1) Press

to select [DARK TIME
SETTING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DARK TIME
SETTING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[0.5 ms] [1.0 ms] [1.5 ms]
[2.7 ms] [2.5 ms] [2.0 ms]
Note
z
This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is
set to any setting other than [SINGLE].
z
When the setting does not correspond to the 3D
system in use, phenomenon such as increased
crosstalk and darkening of displayed images may
occur.
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
86 - ENGLISH
Settings
[3D FRAME DELAY]
Adjust the timing of the left-right switch of an image.
1) Press

to select [3D FRAME
DELAY].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D FRAME
DELAY].
z
Values in the following range change by units of
10 us.
0 us to 25 000 us
[3D TEST MODE]
Set the image display format for use with 3D system
adjustments.
1) Press

to select [3D TEST MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D TEST MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NORMAL]
[SIDE BY
SIDE]
[LEFT/LEFT]
[BLACK/
RIGHT]
[LEFT/
BLACK]
[RIGHT/
RIGHT]
[NORMAL] Standard setting.
[SIDE BY SIDE]
The left eye image is displayed
on the left, next to the right eye
image displayed on the right.
[LEFT/LEFT]
Both the left eye image and right
eye image display the left eye
input signal.
[RIGHT/RIGHT]
Both the left eye image and right
eye image display the right eye
input signal.
[LEFT/BLACK]
The left eye input signal is
displayed in the left eye image
and a completely black image is
displayed in the right eye image.
[BLACK/RIGHT]
A completely black image is
displayed in the left eye image
and the right input signal is
displayed in the right eye image.
Note
z
The [3D TEST MODE] settings return to [NORMAL]
when the projector is switched off.
z
This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is
set to any setting other than [SINGLE].
z
This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is
displayed.
[3D TEST PATTERN]
The 3D test pattern can be used to check operation
and make adjustments even without a 3D signal.
1) Press

to select [3D TEST
PATTERN].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3D TEST
PATTERN].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
Menu screen
+
Entry screen
Menu screen
+
Left: white/
Right: black
Menu screen
+
Left: black/
Right: white
Note
z
The 3D test pattern cannot be displayed when the
following inputs are selected.

VIDEO input

RGB1 input (only when [RGB IN] is set to [Y/C])
z
This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is
set to any setting other than [SINGLE].
[3D SETTINGS] menu (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
ENGLISH - 87
Settings
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MESSAGE]
Set to show or hide safety precaution messages
related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched
on.
1) Press

to select [SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[ON]
Shows safety precaution
messages related to 3D viewing
when the projector is switched on.
[OFF]
Hides safety precaution messages
related to 3D viewing when the
projector is switched on.
Note
z
Set to [OFF] to hide the safety precautions
message when the projector is switched on.
z
A conrmation window is displayed when switched
from [ON] to [OFF]. Select [OK] in the conrmation
window and press the <ENTER> button to change
the setting to [OFF].
Attention
z
When 3D images are viewed by unspecied
number of people for commercial use, display
safety precaution messages related to 3D viewing
to notify viewers.
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
Show safety precaution messages related to 3D
viewing.
1) Press

to select [3D SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] screen is
displayed.
z
Press
󱚣󱚤
to turn the page.
1/2
MENU
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
If you view 3D images, please note below.
In addition, when 3D images will be viewed
by unspecified number of people
or used for commercial applications,
someone in authority should convey
the following precautions.
To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably,
please refer to the Operating Instructions
for in-depth description.
CHANGE
EXIT
2/2
MENU
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please refrain from viewing 3D images
if you do not feel well or are experiencing
visual fatigue.
Please use the contents which has been
properly made for 3D.
View from at least the recommended distance.
(3 times the effective height of the screen)
Refer to the Operating Instructions
if this message is no longer needed.
CHANGE
EXIT
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
88 - ENGLISH
Settings
Select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu,
and select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[COLOR MATCHING]
You can correct the color difference between the sets
when multiple sets are to be used simultaneously.
1) Press

to select [COLOR
MATCHING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [COLOR
MATCHING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [3COLORS] [7COLORS]
[MEASURED]
[709MODE]
[OFF]
Color matching adjustment is not
carried out.
[3COLORS]
The three colors [RED], [GREEN],
and [BLUE] can be adjusted.
[7COLORS]
The seven colors [RED], [GREEN],
[BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],
[YELLOW], and [WHITE] can be
adjusted.
[709MODE] Refer to “To use a colorimeter to
adjust the color matching” (
page 89)
for details about this mode.
[MEASURED]
■
To set [3COLORS] or [7COLORS]
3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] in
Step 2).
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is
displayed.
5) Press

to select [RED], [GREEN],
and [BLUE] (for [7COLORS]: [RED],
[GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],
[YELLOW], and [WHITE]).
6) Press the <ENTER> button
z
The [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN] or
[3COLORS:BLUE] screen is displayed.
For [7COLORS], the [7COLORS:RED],
[7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE],
[7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA],
[7COLORS:YELLOW] or [7COLORS:WHITE]
screen is displayed.
z
Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display
a test pattern of selected colors.
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the level.
z
Adjustment value will change between 0 and
2 048.
Note
z
Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the adjustment color and the same correction
color are moved: The luminance of the adjustment
color will change.
When correction color red is changed: Red is
added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is
added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is
added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
z
This adjustment should be carried out by a person
who is familiar with the projector or by a service
person because a high level of skill is required to
make a successful adjustment.
z
Pressing the <DEFAULT> button will restore the
factory default settings for all items.
z
When [COLOR MATCHING] adjustment has been
set to any setting other than [OFF], the [COLOR
TEMPERATURE] is xed to [USER1].
z
Set [3D COLOR MATCHING] (
page 84) to set
whether 2D and 3D signals are set separately or
whether common data is used. (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only)
z
When 2D and 3D settings are set separately,
[NATIVE] or [3D] is displayed in the upper right of
the menu. (PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 89
Settings
■
To use a colorimeter to adjust the
color matching
Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity
coordinates and luminance to change the colors
[RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],
[YELLOW], and [WHITE] to desired colors.
z
Inputting the current luminance and
chromaticity coordinates
1) Press

to select [COLOR
MATCHING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [709MODE] or
[MEASURED].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE]
screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select [MEASURED
DATA].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.
6) Measure the luminance (Y) and the
chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using
the colorimeter.
7) Press

to select a color, and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust the setting.
z
Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display
a test pattern of selected colors.
8) Once all the input is completed, press
the <MENU> button.
z
The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE]
screen is displayed.
z
Inputting the coordinates of desired
colors (for [MEASURED] only)
9) Press

to select [TARGET DATA].
10)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.
11)
Press

to select a color and press
󱚣󱚤
to input coordinates for desired
colors.
z
Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display
a test pattern of selected colors.
12)
Once all the input is completed, press
the <MENU> button.
Note
z
When [709MODE] is selected in [COLOR
MATCHING], the ITU-R BT.709 standard three
primary colors are set as target data.
z
Colors are not displayed properly when target data
is a color outside the region of this projector.
z
The [709MODE] may differ slightly from the ITU-R
BT.709 standard colors.
z
Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to
automatically display a test pattern for use in
adjusting the selected adjustment colors.
z
Before using a colorimeter or similar instrument to
measure measurement data, set [PICTURE MODE]
to [DYNAMIC].
z
A difference in the color coordinates of target
data and measurement values obtained from an
instrument may occur for certain instruments and
measurement environments used.
z
The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting s change
in conjunction with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN]
settings in [EDGE BLENDING].
[LARGE SCREEN
CORRECTION]
Corrects the phenomenon in which colors that appear
lighter when viewed on a large screen viewed from
a close distance compared to when viewed on an
average screen size so that colors appear the same.
1) Press

to select [LARGE SCREEN
CORRECTION].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LARGE SCREEN
CORRECTION].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] (No
correction)
[1] (Low) [2] (High)
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
90 - ENGLISH
Settings
[SCREEN SETTING]
(PT-DZ21KE
and PT-DS20KE only)
Set the screen size.
When changing the aspect of a projected image,
correct to the optimum image position for the set
screen. Set as necessary for the screen in use.
■
For PT-DZ21KE
1) Press

to select [SCREEN
SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SCREEN
FORMAT].
[16:10] [4:3] [16:9]
4) Press

to select [SCREEN
POSITION].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust [SCREEN
POSITION].
z
When [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:9], the
vertical position can be adjusted from -60 to
+60.
z
When [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3], the
horizontal position can be adjusted from -160 to
+160.
■
For PT-DS20KE
1) Press

to select [SCREEN
SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SCREEN
FORMAT].
[4:3] [16:9]
4) Press

to select [SCREEN
POSITION].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust [SCREEN
POSITION].
z
When [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:9], the
vertical position can be adjusted from -132 to
+131.
Note
z
[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be adjusted in
PT-DZ21KE when [SCREEN FORMAT] is [16:10],
or in PT-DS20KE when [SCREEN FORMAT] is
[4:3].
[AUTO SIGNAL]
Set automatic execution of auto setup.
The screen display position or signal level can be
adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO
SETUP> button on the remote control on each
occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently
at meetings, etc.
1) Press

to select [AUTO SIGNAL].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [AUTO SIGNAL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF] Set input auto setup to off.
[ON]
Auto setup is automatically
executed when images are
changed to unregistered signals
during projection.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 91
Settings
[AUTO SETUP]
You can set when adjusting a special signal or
horizontally long (16:9, etc.) signal.
1) Press

to select [AUTO SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [MODE]
4) Select [MODE] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[DEFAULT] [WIDE] [USER]
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[WIDE]
Select when an image aspect is a
wide-screen signal, which does not
meet the [DEFAULT] settings.
[USER]
Select when displaying a signal
with a special horizontal resolution
(number of display dots).
z
If [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] was selected in
Step 5)
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
Automatic adjustment is executed.
[PROGRESS] is displayed while automatically
adjusting. When complete, the system returns
to the [AUTO SETUP] screen.
z
If [USER] was selected in Step 5)
6) Press

to select [DISPLAY DOTS],
and press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust [DISPLAY
DOTS] to the horizontal resolution of
the signal source.
7) Press

to select [MODE].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
Automatic adjustment is executed.
[PROGRESS] is displayed while automatically
adjusting. When complete, the system returns
to the [AUTO SETUP] screen.
■
To adjust position automatically
4) Select [POSITION ADJUST] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [POSITION
ADJUST].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF]
Does not perform automatic
adjustment.
[ON]
Adjust the screen position and size
when auto setup is executed.
■
To adjust signal level
automatically
4) Select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] in
Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SIGNAL LEVEL
ADJUST].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF]
Does not perform automatic
adjustment.
[ON]
Adjust black level (on-screen menu
[BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (on-
screen menu [CONTRAST]) when
auto setup is executed.
Note
z
[SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] may not function
properly unless a still image containing clear blacks
and whites is input.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
92 - ENGLISH
Settings
[RGB IN]
(supported during RGB
signal input only)
Set to match the signal to input to the <RGB 1 IN>
terminal.
1) Press

to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [RGB1 INPUT SETTING]
4) Select [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [RGB1 INPUT
SETTING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[RGB/YP
B
P
R
] [Y/C]
[RGB/YP
B
P
R
]
Select when inputting an RGB signal
to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
[Y/C]
Select when inputting a luminance
signal and color signal to the <RGB
1 IN> terminal.
■
To switch the slice level of an
input sync signal
4) Select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or
[RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the [RGB1 SYNC
SLICE LEVEL] or the [RGB2 SYNC
SLICE LEVEL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[LOW] [HIGH]
[LOW] Set the slice level to [LOW].
[HIGH] Set the slice level to [HIGH].
[DVI-D IN]
Switch the setting when the external equipment is
connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal of the projector
and the image is not projected correctly.
1) Press

to select [DVI-D IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select [DVI EDID].
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DVI EDID].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[EDID3] [EDID1] [EDID2:PC]
[EDID3]
Switch between ne settings for a
moving image and for a still image.
[EDID1]
Select mainly when an external
device that outputs movie-type
image signals (such as a blu-ray
disk player) is connected to the
<DVI-D IN> terminal.
[EDID2:PC]
Select mainly when an external
device that outputs still image-
type signals (such as a computer)
is connected to the <DVI-D IN>
terminal.
5) Press

to select [DVI SIGNAL
LEVEL].
6) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DVI SIGNAL
LEVEL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[0-255:PC] [16-235]
[0-255:PC]
Select when an external device
(such as a computer) is connected
via DVI-D terminal output.
[16-235]
Select when an external device
(such as a blu-ray disc player)
is connected via HDMI terminal
output by use of a conversion cable
or similar cable.
Note
z
The optimal setting is different depending on the
output setting of the connected external equipment.
Refer to the instruction manual of the external
equipment regarding the output of the external
equipment.
z
The data for Plug and play will change when the
setting is changed. Refer to “List of compatible
signals” (
page 167) for a resolution that supports
plug and play.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 93
Settings
[HDMI IN]
Switch the setting when the projector is connected to
an external device via an HDMI cable and the image
is not projected correctly.
1) Press

to select [HDMI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [HDMI SIGNAL
LEVEL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[0-1023] [64-940]
[0-1023]
Select when the DVI-D terminal
output of an external device (such
as a computer) is connected to the
<HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion
cable or similar cable.
Select also when the HDMI terminal
output of a computer or other device
is connected to the <HDMI IN>
terminal.
[64-940]
Select when the HDMI terminal of
an external device (such as a blu-
ray disc player) is connected to the
<HDMI IN> terminal.
Note
z
The optimal setting is different depending on the
output setting of the connected external equipment.
Refer to the instruction manual of the external
equipment regarding the output of the external
equipment.
z
The HDMI signal level is displayed per each 30 bits
of input.
[SDI IN]
(PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE
only)
Set to match the signal to input to the <SDI IN
1>/<SDI IN 2> terminal.
1) Press

to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [SDI LINK]
4) Select [SDI LINK] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SDI LINK].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[SINGLE LINK] [DUAL LINK]
[SINGLE
LINK]
Set SDI1 input and SDI2 input to
single link.
[DUAL LINK]
Set SDI1 input and SDI2 input to
dual link.
■
To set [SDI SIGNAL LEVEL]
Select the amplitude of the signal to input.
4) Select [SDI SIGNAL LEVEL] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SDI SIGNAL
LEVEL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[64-940] [4-1019]
[64-940] Normally use this setting.
[4-1019]
Select when gray is displayed as
black.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
94 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
To set [BIT DEPTH]
4) Select [BIT DEPTH] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [BIT DEPTH].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[AUTO] [12-bit] [10-bit]
[AUTO]
Automatically select 12 bits or 10
bits.
[12-bit] Fix to 12 bits.
[10-bit] Fix to 10 bits.
■
To set [3G-SDI MAPPING]
4) Select [3G-SDI MAPPING] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [3G-SDI
MAPPING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[AUTO] [LEVEL A] [LEVEL B]
[AUTO]
Automatically select level A or level
B.
[LEVEL A] Fix to level A.
[LEVEL B] Fix to level B.
Note
z
Does not operate during SD-SDI or HD-SDI input.
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
1) Press

to select [ON-SCREEN
DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select an item, and press
󱚣󱚤
to change the setting.
■
[OSD POSITION]
Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[2] (Center left of
the screen)
[3] (Bottom left of
the screen)
[1] (Top left of the
screen)
[4] (Top center of
the screen)
[5] (Center of the
screen)
[9] (Bottom right of
the screen)
[6] (Bottom center
of the screen)
[8] (Center right of
the screen)
[7] (Top right of the
screen)
■
[OSD DESIGN]
Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[1]: Yellow [2]: Blue
[6]: Brown [3]: White
[5]: Pink [4]: Green
■
[OSD MEMORY]
Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD)
cursor.
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
Note
z
Even if set to [ON], the cursor position will not
be held when the <MAIN POWER> switch of the
projector body is turned <OFF>.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 95
Settings
■
[INPUT GUIDE]
Set display of the input terminal name, signal name
and memory number currently selected in the position
set by the [OSD POSITION].
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
■
[WARNING MESSAGE]
You can set the display/hide of the warning message.
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[BACK COLOR]
Set the color of the projected image when there is no
signal input.
1) Press

to select [BACK COLOR].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [BACK COLOR].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[BLUE] [BLACK]
[USER LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO]
[BLUE]
The entire projection area appears
blue.
[BLACK]
The entire projection area appears
black.
[DEFAULT
LOGO]
The Panasonic logo is projected.
[USER
LOGO]
The picture registered by the user is
projected.
Note
z
To create the image for [USER LOGO], “Logo
Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-
ROM is required.
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1) Press

to select [STARTUP LOGO].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [STARTUP LOGO].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[DEFAULT
LOGO]
[USER
LOGO]
[NONE]
[DEFAULT
LOGO]
The Panasonic logo is projected.
[USER
LOGO]
The picture registered by the user is
projected.
[NONE] No startup logo is projected.
Note
z
The startup logo will disappear in approximately 15
seconds.
z
To create the image for [USER LOGO], “Logo
Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-
ROM is required.
[UNIFORMITY]
Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the
entire screen.
1) Press

to select [UNIFORMITY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set per color
4) Select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], and
[BLUE] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
Adjust the setting to a value from [–127] to
[+127].
z
[VERTICAL]
Operation Adjustment
Press
󱚤
. Deepens upper colors.
Press
󱚣
. Deepens lower colors.
z
[HORIZONTAL]
Operation Adjustment
Press
󱚤
. Deepens colors on the left.
Press
󱚣
. Deepens colors on the right.
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
96 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
To set [PC CORRECTION]
To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, an optional
upgrade kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To
purchase the product, consult your dealer.
4) Select [PC CORRECTION] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[ON]
*1
Use a computer to correct the
brightness and color unevenness of
the entire screen.
[OFF]
A computer cannot be used to
correct.
*1: Advanced skills are necessary to use computer controls to
correct. Consult your dealer.
Note
z
[UNIFORMITY] can be set for each [LAMP
SELECT] setting.
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set image fade-in and fade-out at opening and closing
of the shutter. Set automatic opening and closing of
the shutter when power is turned on and off.
1) Press

to select [SHUTTER
SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]
4) Select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT] in
Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
The setting can be set to [OFF], or to a value
from [0.5 s] to [4.0 s].
Note
z
Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote
control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-
out to cancel the fade operation.
■
Setting [STARTUP]
4) Select [STARTUP] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OPEN] [CLOSE]
[OPEN]
Projection begins when the shutter
is open and the power is turned on.
[CLOSE]
Projection begins when the shutter
is closed and the power is turned on.
■
To set [SHUT-OFF]
4) Select [SHUT-OFF] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OPEN] [CLOSE]
[KEEP CURRENT
STATE]
[OPEN]
Enters standby when the shutter is
open and the power is turned off.
[CLOSE]
Enters standby when the shutter is
closed and the power is turned off.
[KEEP
CURRENT
STATE]
Maintains the current shutter status
and enters standby when the power
is turned off.
[FREEZE]
The projected image is paused temporarily regardless
of the playback of the external equipment.
1) Press

to select [FREEZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
Press the <MENU> button to release.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Use the input signals from a connected external
device to display in a waveform. Check whether
image output (luminance) signal level is within the
recommended range for the projector and adjust.
1) Press

to select [WAVEFORM
MONITOR].
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 97
Settings
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [WAVEFORM
MONITOR].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
3) Press the <MENU> button two times to
clear.
4) Press

to select any horizontal
line.
z
Items switch as in the following diagram
each time the <ENTER> is pressed while the
waveform monitor is displayed.
“Select line (luminance)”
“Select line (red)”
“Select line (blue)” “Select line (green)”
Note
z
The [FUNCTION BUTTON] (
page 110) can also be
used to set.
■
To adjust the waveform
Project the luminance adjustment signal of a
commercial test disk (0% (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) - 100%
(100 IRE) ) and adjust.
Signal level
Image
displayable
area
Screen position
z
Luminance adjustment
1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the
waveform monitor.
2) Adjust black level.
z
Use [BRIGHTNESS] in the on-screen menu
[PICTURE] to adjust the black level 0% of the
image signal to the 0% position of the waveform
monitor.
3) Adjust white level.
z
Use [CONTRAST] in the on-screen menu
[PICTURE] to adjust the white level 100% of
the image signal to the 100% position of the
waveform monitor.
z
Red, green and blue adjustment
1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to
[USER1] or [USER2]. (
page 66)
2) Select “Select line (red)” on the
waveform monitor.
3) Adjust dark red areas.
z
Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to
adjust the black level 0% of the image signal
to the 0% position of the waveform monitor.
(
page 66)
4) Adjust bright red areas.
z
Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to
adjust the white level 100% of the image signal
to the 100% position of the waveform monitor.
(
page 66)
5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust
[GREEN] and [BLUE].
Note
z
Before adjusting the black level for DVI-D signals,
HDMI signals, and SDI signals, conrm that the [DVI
SIGNAL LEVEL], [HDMI SIGNAL LEVEL], and [SDI
SIGNAL LEVEL] settings are correct.
z
Waveform monitor cannot be displayed in [P IN P].
z
The waveform monitor turns off when [P IN P] is
executed during waveform monitoring.
z
The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-
screen display is hidden (off).
z
To display the waveform monitor in 3D image, use
[3D WAVEFORM MONITOR]. (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only)
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
98 - ENGLISH
Settings
[CUT OFF]
Each red, green and blue color component can be
removed.
1) Press

to select [CUT OFF].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select [RED], [GREEN],
or [BLUE].
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF] Disables cutoff.
[ON] Enables cutoff.
Note
z
When input is switched or a signal is switched, the
cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 99
Settings
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main
menu, and select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that
can be used when multiple projectors are used side
by side to enable simultaneous control or individual
control via one remote control.
1) Press

to select [PROJECTOR ID].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [PROJECTOR ID].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ALL] [1]
[64] [2]
Note
z
The ID number can be set to a value from [ALL], [1]
to [64].
z
To specify an ID number for individual control, the
ID number of a remote control must match the ID
number of the projector.
z
When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector
will operate regardless of the ID number specied
during remote control or computer control. If
multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs
set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately
from the projectors with other ID numbers.
z
Refer to “Setting Remote control ID numbers”
(
page 27) regarding the method to set the ID
number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the
installation status of the projector.
Change the projection method if the screen display is
upside down or inverted.
1) Press

to select [PROJECTION
METHOD].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select the projection
method.
[FRONT/FLOOR]
When installing on the desk,
etc., in front of the screen
[FRONT/CEILING]
When installing using the
ceiling mount bracket (optional
accessories) in front of the
screen
[REAR/FLOOR]
When installing on the desk,
etc., behind the screen (using a
translucent screen)
[REAR/CEILING]
When installing using the
ceiling mount bracket (optional
accessories) behind the screen
(using a translucent screen)
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
Attention
z
When [PROJECTION METHOD] is changed,
confirm that [COOLING CONDITION] (
page 100) is
set correctly.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
100 - ENGLISH
Settings
[COOLING CONDITION]
Change the fan control depending on the direction of
projection.
Set [COOLING CONDITION] correctly in accordance with
the direction of projection referencing the following gure. It
may shorten the life of the lamp if used in incorrect setting.
1) Press

to select [COOLING
CONDITION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COOLING CONDITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select a cooling condition.
：
[VERTICAL UP
SETTING]
[FLOOR
SETTING]
[CEILING
SETTING]
[VERTICAL DOWN
SETTING]
Projection direction
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]
Set to [ON] to use the projector at 1 400 m (4 593 ft)
to 2 700 m (8 858 ft) elevations.
1) Press

to select [HIGH ALTITUDE
MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [HIGH ALTITUDE
MODE].
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF]
When using at a place lower than
1 400 m (4 593 ft) above sea level
[ON]
When using at a high altitude
(1 400 m (4 593 ft) or higher and
lower than 2 700 m (8 858 ft) above
sea level)
3) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
The speed of the fan increases and the operation
sound becomes louder when set to [ON].
z
The optional smoke cut lter cannot be used when
in high elevation mode.
[LAMP SELECT]
Select luminous lamps from the four equipped in the
projector body to turn on for a certain use condition or
purpose.
1) Press

to select [LAMP SELECT].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LAMP SELECT].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[L1] [L2]
[QUAD] (4 lit) [L3]
[TRIPLE] (3 lit) [L4]
[DUAL] (2 lit) [L1/L4]
[SINGLE] (1 lit) [L2/L3]
[L2/L3/L4] [L1/L2/L3]
[L1/L3/L4] [L1/L2/L4]
[L1] Lamp 1 will light.
[L2] Lamp 2 will light.
[L3] Lamp 3 will light.
[L4] Lamp 4 will light.
[L1/L4] Lamp 1 and Lamp 4 will light.
[L2/L3] Lamp 2 and Lamp 3 will light.
[L1/L2/L3]
Lamp 1, Lamp 2 and Lamp 3 will light.
[L1/L2/L4]
Lamp 1, Lamp 2 and Lamp 4 will light.
[L1/L3/L4]
Lamp 1, Lamp 3 and Lamp 4 will light.
[L2/L3/L4]
Lamp 2, Lamp 3 and Lamp 4 will light.
[SINGLE]
(1 lit)
One lamp will light. (A short usage
time lamp will automatically light.)
[DUAL]
(2 lit)
Two lamps will light. (A short usage
time lamp will automatically light.)
[TRIPLE]
(3 lit)
Three lamps will light. (A short usage
time lamp will automatically light.)
[QUAD]
(4 lit)
Four lamps will light.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 101
Settings
Note
z
For a set time after [LAMP SELECT] is switched,
[LAMP SELECT] cannot be switched again,
because the speed of the lamp replacement cycle
will increase. Repeatedly switching [LAMP SELECT]
in a short time will also increase the speed of the
lamp replacement cycle.
z
The colors of the items indicate the status.
Green → Current setting
Yellow → Current setting
(When there is a lamp that cannot turn on or failed
to turn on)
Red → Lamp that has failed to turn on
White → Any other status
z
When a lamp fails to turn on or has been used in
excess of 2 000 hours and a setting other than
[QUAD] is selected, that lamp is turned off and
another lamp turned on.
When a lamp fails to turn on or has been used in
excess of 2 000 hours in [QUAD], a lamp that has
not been used in excess of 2 000 hours is turned
on.
The projector enters standby mode when all lamps
have been used in excess of 2 000 hours.
z
Ensure that lamp units not to be turned on are also
installed.
z
More lamps than the specied number of lamps
light temporarily to prevent decreased illuminance
when a lamp is switched.
[LAMP RELAY]
The lump to be turned on can be automatically
switched by setting a day and time.
The degradation of the lamp due to continuous usage
can be reduced by automatically switching the lamp
to be turned on when using the projector continuously
for a week or more.
1) Press

to select [LAMP RELAY].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LAMP RELAY].
z
The time setting to switch the lamp will change
as follows each time you press the button.
[OFF] [24H] [1WEEK]
3) Press

to select [TIME].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
Enters adjustment mode (the display is
blinking).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [HOUR] or
[MINUTE], and then press

to
adjust it.
(1 hour or 1 minute increments)
[00:00] [00:01] [00:59]
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The adjusted time is established.
7) Press

to select [DAY OF THE
WEEK].
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DAY OF THE
WEEK].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[SUNDAY] [MONDAY] [TUESDAY]
[WEDNESDAY]
[SATURDAY] [FRIDAY] [THURSDAY]
Note
z
The [LAMP RELAY] function is enabled when
[SINGLE], [DUAL], [TRIPLE], or [QUAD] is selected
in [LAMP SELECT].
z
When [SINGLE] or [DUAL] is selected in [LAMP
SELECT], the lamp switches to the specied time.
When [TRIPLE] is selected in [LAMP SELECT], the
lamp switches a total of three times every two hours
from the specied time, and thereafter maintains
the previous status until the specied time.
When [QUAD] is selected in [LAMP SELECT],
three turn on at the specied time and the three
lamps switch every two hours for a total of four
times. Next, four lamps turn on eight hours after the
specied time and thereafter three lamps switch
again after the specied time.
z
The operating time will be the local time. (
page 110)
z
Use the number (<0> to <9>) buttons on the remote
control to directly enter the time.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
102 - ENGLISH
Settings
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
The projector is equipped with a luminance sensor to
measure brightness and functions to correct screen
brightness resulting from changes in lamp brightness.
Use the projector when using multiple projectors to
display on multiple screens to reduce changes in
overall brightness of the multiple screens due to lamp
degradation and suppress variation in brightness to
preserve uniformity.
1) Press

to select [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
GAIN]
Adjust brightness when using multiple projectors to
display on multiple screens.
4) Select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN]
in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Range
Brightness
Maximum
brightness
correction
Press
󱚤
.
The screen
becomes
brighter.
The
maximum
correction
amount
decreases.
Maximum
value
100%
Press
󱚣
.
The screen
becomes
darker.
The
maximum
correction
amount
increases.
Minimum
value
20%
Note
z
When one projector is used, the maximum
correction amount is the value obtained when
the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] value is
subtracted from 100%. When [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL GAIN] is 100%, the maximum correction
amount is 0% and brightness cannot be corrected
due to luminance controls.
z
Luminance will be unsteady for eight minutes after
a lamp is turned on. Adjust after eight minutes have
elapsed from the time that the power is switched
on.
z
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] adjustments are
reected to all image signals, internal test patterns,
and on-screen menus.
z
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] is enabled even
if [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is [OFF].
■
To set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
SETUP]
Set the operation of luminance control.
4) Select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
SETUP] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]
screen is displayed.
6) Press

to select [MODE].
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [AUTO] [PC]
[OFF]
No correction performed by the
luminance sensor.
[AUTO]
Correction is performed by the
luminance sensor.
Automatically corrects screen
brightness when lamp brightness
changes.
[PC]
Use a computer and the dedicated
“Multi Projector Monitoring & Control
Software”
*1
to connect nine or more
projectors.
*1: “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included
in the attached CD-ROM.
z
Setting [MODE] to [AUTO]
8) Press

to select [LINK].
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LINK].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [GROUP A]
[GROUP D] [GROUP C] [GROUP B]
[OFF]
Uses the luminance sensor on one
projector to perform correction without
connecting another projector.
The length of time that constant
brightness can be maintained increases
as the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
GAIN] value decreases.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]
Correction by luminance sensor is
performed by connecting several
projectors.
Use network functions to set up to four
A to D groups within the same subnet.
Up to eight projectors can be registered
and connected in each group.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 103
Settings
10)
Press

to select [CALIBRATION
TIME].
11)
Press the <ENTER> button.
12)
Enter the time and press the <ENTER>
button
z
Measure brightness at a specied time.
Dynamic iris is xed to open during
measurement.
13)
Press

to select [CALIBRATION
MESSAGE].
14)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [CALIBRATION
MESSAGE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[ON]
Displays a message during
calibration.
[OFF]
Does not display a message during
calibration.
15)
Press

to select [APPLY].
16)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The set [MODE] and [LINK] are enabled, and
LAMP RELAY screen alert is displayed when
the [LAMP RELAY] setting is [OFF]. When
[CALIBRATION MESSAGE] is set to [ON], a
calibration running message is displayed which
will automatically disappear 30 seconds after
calibration completes.
z
If the [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
SETUP] is not [OFF] when the <ENTER>
button is pressed, the lamp brightness at that
time is recorded as the standard brightness.
z
If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK]
is [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name
is displayed on the projector screen set as the
same group.
/,1. *5283$
Note
z
When setting the [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO] or [PC], [APPLY]
luminance control after the shutter is open for at
least two minutes.
z
If the shutter is closed within approx. 10 minutes
from the time that the lamp turns on when operating
with the [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], brightness may be
corrected approx. two minutes after the shutter
opens because brightness could not be measured.
z
When operating with the [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], lamp
brightness is automatically measured eight minutes
after a lamp is turned on, and corrected to the same
value as the screen brightness and the standard
brightness at the time of [APPLY]. Lamp brightness
cannot be measured during the eight minutes after
it is turned on because it is not steady.
z
When [LAMP SELECT] is 2 lit or higher and the
[MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is
operating in [AUTO] and a light fails to turn on or
LAMP RELAY is performed, brightness is corrected
one minute later whenever possible.
z
When operating with [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is
[OFF], brightness correction is performed until
correction exceeds the maximum correction
amount.
z
In certain projector environments, dust may
accumulate on the lens or screen or inside the
projector and increase variation in brightness.
z
Adjust luminance control again when lamp
degradation causes increased variation in
brightness or a lamp is replaced.
z
For continued use longer than 24 hours, set
the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to
[CALIBRATION TIME], or set [LAMP RELAY]
(
page 101). Correction is not automatically
executed when not set.
z
Luminance control and iris operate simultaneously,
but the iris does not operate when fully open while
a brightness measurement is performed.
z
The setting of [CALIBRATION TIME] applies at the
time when the time is entered.
z
The setting of [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] applies
at the time when the item is switched with
󱚣󱚤
.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
104 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
To set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
STATUS]
Displays the luminance control status.
4) Select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
STATUS] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]
screen is displayed.
z
When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] is [OFF]
Displays the luminance control disabled status.
0(18
5(7851
%5,*+71(66&21752/67$786
02'(
352-(&725
2))
(1) Displays the name of the projector in question.
z
When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] is [AUTO] and the
[LINK] is [OFF]
Displays the luminance control status of Projector 1.
0(18
5(7851
/,1.
352-(&725
2))
%5,*+71(66&21752/67$786
(1) Displays the name of the projector in question.
(2) Uses color to display status.
Green: There is margin for brightness correction.
Yellow: There is less margin for brightness correction.
Red: An error occurred in luminance control.
z
When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] is [AUTO] and the
[LINK] is [GROUP A] to [GROUP D]
Displays the luminance control status of connected
projectors (up to eight), including projectors
operated by the on-screen menu.










/,1.
83'$7(
352-(&725
*5283$
352-(&725
352-(&725
%5,*+71(66&21752/67$786
0(186(/(&7
(1) Displays the groups to connect.
(2) Displays the name and IP address of the projector in
question.
(3) Displays the name and IP address of projectors in the same
group that were detected on the network.
(4) Uses color to display status.
Green: There is margin for brightness correction.
Yellow: There is less margin for brightness correction.
Red: An error occurred in luminance control.
(5) Displays an error message.
(6) Updates to the latest information.
If the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
to some projectors.] is displayed, connection of the projector
displayed in red font has failed.
Press

to select the projector displayed in red font and
press the <ENTER> button to display error details.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 105
Settings
z
Error details
Error message Remedy
[Exceed maximum
number of projectors.]
z
Set no more than eight
projectors in one group.
z
Use a computer and
the dedicated “Multi
Projector Monitoring &
Control Software”
*1
to
connect nine or more
projectors.
[Please check the
COMMAND CONTROL
setting.]
z
Set the on-screen menu
[NETWORK CONTROL]
[COMMAND CONTROL]
to [ON] for the projector
in error.
z
Set the [NETWORK
CONTROL] [COMMAND
PORT] of all projectors
to be connected to the
same value.
[Please check the
USER NAME and
PASSWORD in the
COMMAND CONTROL
setting.]
z
Set the same character
string to the [User
name] and [Password]
that has Web control
administrator rights
for all projectors to be
connected.
[Cannot apply
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL. Please
check projector status.]
z
The projector is in
standby status. Switch
on the projector.
[Brightness Sensor
Error]
z
There is a problem with
the luminance sensor.
If the problem is not
corrected by turning off
the power and turning it
on again, consult your
dealer.
*1: “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included
in the attached CD-ROM.
Note
z
Check the following when a projector to be
connected is not listed.

Is there a device on the network with the same IP
address?

Is a LAN cable connected correctly? (
page 126)

Is the projector subnet identical?

Is [LINK] set to the same group?
z
To change a projector name, refer to [NETWORK
SETUP] (
page 125), or [Network cong] page
(
page 133).
z
When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] is [PC]
0(18
5(7851
02'(
352-(&725
3&
%5,*+71(66&21752/67$786
(1) Displays the name of the projector in question.
(2) Uses color to display status.
Green
:
There is margin for brightness correction.
Yellow
:
There is less margin for brightness correction.
Red: An error occurred in luminance control.
■
Example steps to adjust
luminance control
The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the
brightness of eight projectors connected in a network.
1) Use a LAN cable to connect all
projectors to a hub. (
page 126)
2) Switch on all projectors.
3) Set [LAMP SELECT] to either [DUAL]
or [SINGLE] for all projectors.
4) Set [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF] and
[APPLY].
5) Set [SUBNET MASK] of the projectors
to the same value, and [IP ADDRESS]
of each projector to a different value
so that the network can communicate.
6) Wait at least eight minutes until the
lamp brightness becomes steady.
7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of
all projectors to the same values.
8) To match colors, adjust [COLOR
MATCHING].
9) Display the internal test patterns of all
projectors in “completely white”.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
106 - ENGLISH
Settings
10)
Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN]
of all projectors to 100%.
11)
Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN]
of the darkest projector to 90%.
12)
Adjust [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
GAIN] to match the [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL GAIN] set to 90% of the
other projectors.
13)
Set [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] of all projectors to
[AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A].
14)
Select [APPLY] in [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] on all projectors
and press the <ENTER> button.
z
Luminance control starts.
Note
z
Brightness is automatically corrected each time the
lamp blinks when the power is switched on or off.
z
Adjust luminance control again when variation in
brightness has increased or a lamp is replaced.
[STANDBY MODE]
Set the power consumption during the standby.
1) Press

to select [STANDBY MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [STANDBY
MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NORMAL] [ECO]
Note
z
When set to [ECO], network functions and <SERIAL
OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands are
not available during standby. The lighting for the
connecting terminals and control panel does not
turn on.
z
When an error or warning occurs, a self diagnosis
is displayed on the control panel regardless of the
[STANDBY MODE] setting. (
page 25)
z
When set to [ECO], the time taken to start display
may be approximately ten seconds slower than
compared to when set to [NORMAL].
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of
the week.
1) Press

to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SCHEDULE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
Note
z
If [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON], the setting for
[STANDBY MODE] is automatically set to
[NORMAL] and cannot be changed. Even if
[SCHEDULE] is then set to [OFF] when in this
state, the setting of [STANDBY MODE] remains at
[NORMAL].
■
How to assign a program
3) Select [ON] in Step 2), and press the
<ENTER> button.
z
The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
4) Select and assign program to each day
of week.
z
Press

to select the day of week, and press
󱚣󱚤
to select a program number.
z
You can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “-
- -” indicates that the program number has not
been set yet.
■
How to set a program
You can set up to 16 commands to each program.
3) Select [ON] in Step 2), and press the
<ENTER> button.
z
The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select a program number
and then press the <ENTER> button.
6) Press

to select a command
number and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
You can change the page using
󱚣󱚤
.
7) Press

to select [TIME] and press
the <ENTER> button.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select hour and minute,
and press

or the number (<0> to
<9>) buttons on the remote control
to set a time, and press the <ENTER>
button.
9) Press

to select [COMMAND].
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 107
Settings
10)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [COMMAND].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[POWER ON] [STANDBY]
[SHUTTER]
*1
[P IN P]
*1
[LAMP
SELECT]
*1
[INPUT]
*1
*1: Displays the details set in Step 12).
11)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [COMMAND] detailed setting screen is
displayed.
12)
Press

to select a command.
z
For [SHUTTER], [INPUT], [LAMP SELECT],
and [P IN P], the setting will change as follows
each time you press the button.
z
[SHUTTER]
[OPEN]
[CLOSE]
z
[INPUT]
[RGB1] [RGB2] [VIDEO]
[SDI2]
*1
[DVI-D]
[SDI1]
*1
[HDMI]
*1: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
z
[LAMP SELECT]
[SINGLE] [DUAL]
[QUAD] [TRIPLE]
z
[P IN P]
[OFF] [USER1]
[USER3] [USER2]
13)
Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The command is xed and ● is displayed at the
left of the selected command.
z
After the command is xed, press the <MENU>
button to close the detailed setting menu.
14)
Press

to select [STORE], and
press the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
If you try to register a setting that would cause the
lamp to ash for a short time, an error message
will be displayed on the screen. Set the time and
command again.
z
To delete a command already set, press the
<DEFAULT> button on the Step 6) screen, or select
[DELETE] on the Step 7) screen and press the
<ENTER> button.
z
If multiple commands have been set for the same
time, they are executed in chronological order
starting from the smallest command number.
z
The operating time will be the local time. (
page 110)
z
If an operation is executed with the remote control
or control panel of the projector or with a control
command before the command set in [SCHEDULE]
is executed, the command set with this function
may not be executed.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
108 - ENGLISH
Settings
[RS-232C]
Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL
IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal.
1) Press

to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set the communication
condition of the <SERIAL IN>
terminal
4) Select [(IN) BAUDRATE] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [(IN) BAUDRATE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[9600] [19200] [38400]
6) Press

to select [(IN) PARITY].
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [(IN) PARITY].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NONE] [EVEN] [ODD]
■
To set the communication
condition of the <SERIAL OUT>
terminal
4) Select [(OUT) BAUDRATE] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [(OUT)
BAUDRATE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[9600] [19200] [38400]
6) Press

to select [(OUT) PARITY].
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [(OUT) PARITY].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NONE] [EVEN] [ODD]
■
To set the response
4) Select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [RESPONSE(ID
ALL)].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[ON]
Returns the response when the ID
setting is ALL.
[OFF]
Does not return the response when the
ID setting is ALL.
6) Press

to select [GROUP].
7) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [GROUP].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[A] [B] [Z]
[A] to [Z]
Controls multiple projectors
simultaneously by sending the ID of
RS-232C. Set the group from [A] to [Z].
The projector responds when the ID of
RS-232C matches the setting.
8) Press

to select [RESPONSE(ID
GROUP)].
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [RESPONSE(ID
GROUP)].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ON] [OFF]
[ON]
Returns the response when the ID
setting is GROUP.
[OFF]
Does not return the response when the
ID setting is GROUP.
Note
z
Refer to “<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal”
(
page 160) for the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT>
terminals and ID transmission in RS-232C.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 109
Settings
[STATUS]
Displays the status of the projector.
1) Press

to select [STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the pages.
[INPUT]
Displays the input terminal
currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[SIGNAL
FREQUENCY]
Displays the frequency of the
input signal.
[PROJECTOR
RUNTIME]
Displays the operation times of
the projector.
[LAMP1]
Displays the usage time and
status of Lamp 1.
[LAMP2]
Displays the usage time and
status of Lamp 2.
[LAMP3]
Displays the usage time and
status of Lamp 3.
[LAMP4]
Displays the usage time and
status of Lamp 4.
[INTAKE AIR
TEMP.]
Displays the status of the
air intake temperature of the
projector.
[OPTICS
MODULE TEMP.]
Displays the status of the internal
temperature of the projector.
[AROUND LAMP
TEMP.]
Displays the status of the
temperature around the lamps of
the projector.
[REMOTE2
STATUS]
Displays the control status of the
REMOTE2.
[PROJECTOR
TYPE]
Displays the type of the
projector.
[SERIAL
NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the
projector.
[LAMP UNIT
MODEL NO.]
Displays the model no. of the
lamp unit.
[LAMP1 SERIAL
NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the
lamp 1.
[LAMP2 SERIAL
NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the
lamp 2.
[LAMP3 SERIAL
NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the
lamp 3.
[LAMP4 SERIAL
NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the
lamp 4.
[MAIN VERSION]
Displays the main version of the
rmware of the projector.
[SUB VERSION]
Displays the sub version of the
rmware of the projector.
[NETWORK
VERSION]
Displays the network version of
the projector.
[UPGRADE
(ET-UK20)]
Displays the activation status
based on the upgrade kit.
[ON COUNT]
z
[POWER ON TIMES]:
Displays the number of times
the power is turned on.
z
[LAMP1 ON] to [LAMP4 ON]:
Displays the number of times
the lamp is turned on.
z
[SHUTTER]:
Displays the number of times
the shutter is closed.
[NUMBER OF
ENTRY SIGNAL]
Displays the number of
registered signals.
[AC VOLTAGE]
Displays the status of the AC voltage.
[SIGNAL
INFORMATION]
z
[MEMORY NO.]:
Displays the memory number
of the input signal.
z
[INPUT]:
Displays the input terminal
currently selected.
z
[SIGNAL NAME]:
Displays the input signal name.
z
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]:
Displays the frequency of the
input signal.
z
[SYNC.STATE]:
Displays the synch polarity of
the input signal.
z
[V.SYNC WIDTH]:
Displays the vertical sync signal
pulse width of the input signal.
z
[SCAN TYPE]:
Displays the scan type of the
input signal.
z
[TOTAL DOTS]:
Displays the total dot count of
the input signal.
z
[DISPLAY DOTS]:
Displays the number of input
signal display dots.
z
[TOTAL LINES]:
Displays the total line count of
the input signal.
z
[DISPLAY LINES]:
Displays the number of input
signal display lines.
z
[SAMPLING]:
Displays the sampling
information of the input signal.
z
[BIT DEPTH]:
Displays the gradation of the
input signal.
Note
z
Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be
displayed and others not displayed, depending on the
signal being input.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
110 - ENGLISH
Settings
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
You can set the power of the projector automatically
to standby if there is no input signal by the specied
time.
1) Press

to select [NO SIGNAL
SHUT-OFF].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [NO SIGNAL
SHUT-OFF].
[DISABLE]
Disables the No signal shut-off
function.
[10MIN.] -
[90MIN.]
Allows you to set in ten minutes
intervals.
[REMOTE2 MODE]
You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
1) Press

to select [REMOTE2 MODE].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [REMOTE2
MODE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[DEFAULT] [USER]
[L6500
SERIES]
[DEFAULT]
The pin assignment of the
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal is used
by the factory default setting of the
projector. (
page 164)
[USER]
Used to change the setting of the
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
[L6500
SERIES]
Use the settings for the L6500
series compatible REMOTE2
terminal.
■
To set [USER]
3) Select [USER] in Step 2).
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press

to select either [PIN2] or
[PIN8] and press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the
setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the functions of the <FUNC> button on the remote
control.
1) Press

to select [FUNCTION
BUTTON].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select a function.
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNC> button.
[P IN P]
Switches [OFF]/[USER1]/[USER2]/
[USER3] in [P IN P]. (
page 115)
[SUB
MEMORY]
Lists the sub memory. (
page 120)
[SYSTEM
SELECTOR]
Switches to [SYSTEM SELECTOR]
settings. (
page 70)
[SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT
VIEW]
Switches to [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT
VIEW] settings. (
page 68)
[FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image.
(
page 96)
[WAVEFORM
MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input
signal. (
page 96)
[LENS
MEMORY
LOAD]
Calls the registered memory.
(
page 112)
[LEFT/
RIGHT
SWAP]
*1
Switches the ip horizontal settings.
(
page 84)
*1: PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
[DATE AND TIME]
Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock
of the projector.
1) Press

to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set time zone
4) Select [TIME ZONE] in Step 3).
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to set [TIME ZONE].
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 111
Settings
■
To adjust the date and time
manually
4) Select [ADJUST CLOCK] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
6) Press

to select an item, and press
󱚣󱚤
to set the local date and time.
7) Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The setting of the time will be completed.
■
To adjust the date and time
automatically
4) Select [ADJUST CLOCK] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
6) Press

to select [NTP
SYNCHRONIZATION], and press
󱚣󱚤
to change the setting to [ON].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
7) Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The setting of the time will be completed.
Note
z
To set the date and time automatically, the projector
must be connected to the network.
z
If synchronization with the NTP server fails
just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned
[ON], or if [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned
[ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP
SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
z
Access the projector via a web browser to set the
NTP server. (
page 134)
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Automatically set the lens shift limit values and home
position for the projector.
1) Press

to select [LENS
CALIBRATION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
A conrmation message is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
To cancel, select [CANCEL].
z
The lens moves up, down, left and right to
automatically set the lens shift limit values and
home position.
z
The lens stops to complete the calibration.
Note
z
[PROGRESS] is displayed on the menu during lens
calibration. Cannot cancel mid-operation.
z
When lens calibration executes correctly,
[COMPLETE] is displayed and [INCOMPLETE] is
displayed when it does not execute correctly.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
112 - ENGLISH
Settings
[LENS MEMORY]
Save and call the focus position, shift position and
zoom position of an adjusted lens.
1) Press

to select [LENS MEMORY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
Saving lens position
4) Select [LENS MEMORY SAVE] in Step
3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select the item to
initialize, and press the <ENTER>
button.
7) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK], and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
Lens memory input screens are displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the text, and
press the <ENTER> button to enter the
text.
9) After the name is input, press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
The registration completes and returns to the
[LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.
z
If you press
󱚣󱚤
to select [CANCEL]
and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens
memory will not be saved.
z
If you press
󱚣󱚤
to select [DEFAULT] and
press the <ENTER> button, the entered name
will not be registered and the default name will
be used.
z
If you select [OK] without entering any
characters and press the <ENTER> button, the
default name will be used.
■
To call the lens position
4) Select [LENS MEMORY LOAD] in Step
3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select the item to
initialize, and press the <ENTER>
button.
7) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK], and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
Moves automatically to the registered shift,
zoon and focus positions.
Note
z
Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100%
reproduced.
z
The zoom and focus positions may have shifted
after lens memory was called. Readjust as
necessary.
Beware of shift, as errors in zoom position are
particularly signicant.
z
When a lens is replaced, readjust and save the lens
memory again.
z
If a lens without zoom function is used, the lens
memory of the zoom position does not operate.
z
When using the <FUNC> button to assign a [LENS
MEMORY LOAD], the lens memory is called in
order each time you press the <FUNC> button.
■
To delete a lens memory
4) Select [LENS MEMORY EDIT] in Step
3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select [LENS MEMORY
DELETE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is
displayed.
8) Press

to select the item to delete,
and press the <ENTER> button.
9) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK], and press the <ENTER>
button.
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 113
Settings
■
To change the lens memory name
4) Select [LENS MEMORY EDIT] in Step
3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is
displayed.
6) Press

to select [LENS MEMORY
NAME CHANGE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen
is displayed.
8) Press

to select the name to
change, and press the <ENTER>
button.
z
Lens memory name screens are displayed.
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the text, and
press the <ENTER> button to enter the
text.
10)
After the name is changed, press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
<ENTER>.
z
The registration completes and returns to the
[LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.
z
If you press
󱚣󱚤
to select [CANCEL] and
then press the <ENTER> button, the changed
name will not be registered.
z
If you press
󱚣󱚤
to select [DEFAULT] and
press the <ENTER> button, the changed name
will not be registered and the default name will
be used.
z
If you select [OK] without entering any
characters and press the <ENTER>button, the
default name will be used.
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
Save the various setting values as a backup in the
built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press

to select [SAVE ALL USER
DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is
displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press
the <ENTER> button.
4) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
[PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while
the data is saved.
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
Load the various setting values saved as a backup in
the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press

to select [LOAD ALL USER
DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is
displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press
the <ENTER> button.
4) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
The projector will go into the standby status to
reect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER
DATA] is executed.
z
Data set from the computer application is not
included in the [ALL USER DATA].
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
114 - ENGLISH
Settings
[INITIALIZE]
Return various setting values to their factory default
settings.
1) Press

to select [INITIALIZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is
displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select an item to
initialize.
[ALL USER
DATA]
All setting items including [ENTRY
SIGNAL], [NETWORK SETUP],
[E-mail set up], and [USER LOGO]
are returned to factory default
values.
The projector will go into the standby
status to reect the setting values.
[ENTRY
SIGNAL]
Deletes all the setting values saved
for each input signal.
To delete only a part of a registered
signal, perform the procedure
described in “Deleting the registered
data” (
page 118).
[NETWORK/
E-MAIL]
Returns [NETWORK SETUP] and
[E-mail set up] to factory default
settings.
[LOGO
IMAGE]
Deletes the image registered in
[USER LOGO].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
Used by a service person.
[P IN P] menu
ENGLISH - 115
Settings
Select [P IN P] from the main menu, and select
the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
Using P IN P functions
Locate a separate, small sub screen in the main
screen to project two images simultaneously.
1) Press

to select [P IN P].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [P IN P] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select [P IN P MODE],
and press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
4) Press

to select a function.
[OFF] P IN P function is not used.
[USER1]
The items set in “Setting P IN P
functions” (
page 115) are used in P
IN P functions.
[USER2]
[USER3]
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
Setting P IN P functions
P IN P function settings can be saved to [USER1],
[USER2], and [USER3].
1) In Step 4) “Using P IN P functions”,
select the desired mode from [USER1],
[USER2], and [USER3], and press the
<ENTER> button.
z
The settings screen of the selected mode is
displayed.
2) Press

to select an item, and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
The sub-menu of the selected item is displayed.
[MAIN
WINDOW]
The input terminal to be displayed as
the main window is shown. (Press
to select, and press the <ENTER>
button to switch.
z
[SIZE]:
The window display size can be set
from 10% to 100%.
z
[POSITION]:
Set a display location for the main
window in the screen.
[SUB
WINDOW]
The input terminal to be displayed as
the sub window is shown. (Press
to select, and press the <ENTER>
button to switch.)
z
[SIZE]:
The sub window display size can be
set from 10% to 100%.
z
[POSITION]:
Set a display location for the sub
window in the screen.
z
[CLOCK PHASE]:
When the sub window is RGB1 or
RGB2 and a ickering image or
smeared outline appears, set from 0
to 31.
[FRAME
LOCK]
Select a window to which frame lock will
be applied. (Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.)
z
[MAIN WINDOW]:
Set frame lock to the input signal set
in the main window.
z
[SUB WINDOW]:
Set frame lock to the input signal set
in the sub window.
[TYPE]
Select the window displayed on top
when windows overlap. (Press
󱚣󱚤
to
switch.)
z
[MAIN WINDOW]:
The main window has display priority.
z
[SUB WINDOW]:
The sub window has display priority.
[P IN P] menu
[P IN P] menu
116 - ENGLISH
Settings
Note
z
The P IN P functions may not be available for some
signals being input or terminals being selected.
Refer to “Two window display combination list”
(
page 165) for details.
z
The main window setting values are applied to
adjustment values such as [PICTURE MODE],
[GAMMA], and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
z
On the main screen (when no menu is displayed),
press
󱚣󱚤
to switch the sizes and positions of
the main window and sub window while P IN P is
operating.
z
3D images cannot be displayed in P IN P.
(PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE only)
z
The P IN P state continue even if 3D simultaneous
is used to display 3D images in P IN P. (PT-DZ21KE
and PT-DS20KE only)
[TEST PATTERN] menu
ENGLISH - 117
Settings
[TEST PATTERN] menu
Select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch.
[TEST PATTERN]
Displays the test pattern built-in to the projector.
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not
be reected in test patterns. Make sure to display the
input signal before performing various adjustments.
Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [TEST PATTERN].
z
The setting will change as follows each time you
press the button.
Menu screen
+
Focus
Menu screen
+
Entry screen
Menu screen
+
16:9/4:3 aspect
frame
Menu screen
+
All white
Menu screen
+
Color bar (horizontal)
Menu screen
+
All black
Menu screen
+
Color bar (vertical)
Menu screen
+
Window
Menu screen
+
Window (inversion)
Note
z
Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote
control while the test pattern is displayed to hide
the menu screen.
■
To change color or a focus test
pattern
When the “Menu Screen + Focus” test pattern is
displayed, the color can be changed.
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the “Menu Screen
+ Focus” test pattern.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select a color, and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
The test pattern color changed to the color
selected.
Note
z
The test pattern color settings return to [WHITE]
when the projector is switched off.
z
The only test pattern colors that can be changed
are the “Focus Test Pattern” colors.
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
118 - ENGLISH
Settings
Select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
■
Registered signal status
z
A name can be set for each sub memory
(
page 120).
z
Memory number: A1 (1-2)
Sub memory number
When the address number (A1, A2, ... H7, H8)
is registered
Registering a signal to the list
After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button
on the remote control or the control panel is pressed,
the registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU]
screen is displayed.
Note
z
Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be
registered to the projector.
z
There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through
L, with eight memories possible on each page) for
memory numbers, and it is registered to the lowest
number that is available. If there is no available
memory number it will be overwritten from the
oldest signal.
z
The names to be registered are automatically
determined by the input signals and memory
numbers.
z
If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will
be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered data
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the signal for
which details are to be displayed.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen
is displayed.
z
The name, memory number, input terminal,
frequency, synchronization signal, etc., of the
input signal are displayed.
z
Press the <MENU> button to return to the
[REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is
displayed.
4) Press

to select [SIGNAL NAME
CHANGE].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is
displayed.
6) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the text, and
press the <ENTER> button to enter the
text.
7) After the name is changed, press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press the
<ENTER> button.
z
The registration is completed and it will return
to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
z
When pressing
󱚣󱚤
to select [CANCEL]
and pressing the <ENTER> button, the
changed signal name will not be registered and
an automatically registered signal name will be
used.
Deleting the registered data
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the signal to
delete.
2) Press the <DEFAULT> button.
z
The [ENTRY SIGNAL DELETE] screen is
displayed.
z
To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU>
button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL
LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The selected signal will be deleted.
Note
z
A signal can also be deleted from [ENTRY SIGNAL
DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP]
screen.
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
ENGLISH - 119
Settings
Protecting the registered data
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the signal to
protect.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen
is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is
displayed.
4) Press

to select [LOCK].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LOCK].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF] The signal is not protected.
[ON] The signal is protected.
Note
z
When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal delete, image
adjustment and auto setup are not available. To
perform these operations, set [LOCK] to [OFF].
z
A signal can be registered to sub memory even if it
is protected.
z
Even a protected signal will be deleted if
[INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in
range
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the signal to
set.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen
is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is
displayed.
4) Press

to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].
5) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [LOCK-IN
RANGE].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[NARROW] [WIDE]
[NARROW] Select in most cases.
[WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
Note
z
Switch the range that determines that a signal to be
input is the same signal that is already registered.
z
To prioritize the determination that it is the same
signal that is already registered, set to the [WIDE]
setting.
z
Use in cases such as when the synchronizing
frequency of a signal to be input has changed
slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
z
Can only be used when a signal is input from
the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2 IN> terminal,
<DVI-D IN> terminal, or <HDMI IN> terminal.
z
When [WIDE] is set, the image may appear
distorted because a signal is determined to be the
same signal even if a synchronizing frequency
changes slightly.
z
When a signal to be input corresponds to the
signal set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high
memory number receives priority. Example: a signal
to be input that corresponds to memory numbers
A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
z
When a registration signal is deleted, the settings
are also deleted.
z
In an environment where multiple types of signals
are input to the same terminal, signals are
sometimes not determined correctly when settings
are set to [WIDE].
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
120 - ENGLISH
Settings
Managing the sub memory
list
The projector has a sub memory function that can
register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it
is recognized as the same signal by the frequency or
format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to adjust the picture
quality such as switching of the aspect ratio or white
balance by the same synchronization signal source.
The sub memory includes all the data that can be
adjusted for each signal, such as the screen aspect
ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] item
([CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], etc.).
■
To register the current settings to
the list
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
on the normal screen (when
the menu is not displayed).
z
The sub memory registration screen is
displayed if the sub memory is not registered.
Proceed to Step 3).
z
A list of sub memories registered to the signal
currently input is displayed.
z
By selecting [SUB MEMORY] in the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION
BUTTON], the <FUNC> button can be used
instead of
󱚣󱚤
.
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the sub
memory number to register in [SUB
MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [RENAME] screen is displayed.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
To rename the registered data, follow the
procedure in Steps 4) and 5) in “Renaming the
registered data” (
page 118).
■
To switch to the sub memory list
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
on the normal screen (when
the menu is not displayed).
z
A list of sub memories registered to the signal
currently input is displayed.
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the signal to
switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
This switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
■
To delete the sub memory data
1) Press
󱚣󱚤
on the normal screen (when
the menu is not displayed).
z
[SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2) Use the
󱚣󱚤
buttons to select
the item to delete, and press the
<DEFAULT> button.
z
[ENTRY SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
z
To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU>
button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST]
screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The selected sub memory will be deleted.
[SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 121
Settings
[SECURITY] menu
Select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and
select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
When the projector is used for the rst time
Initial password: Press
󱚤󱚣󱚤󱚣
in
order, and press the <ENTER> button.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
Attention
z
When you select the [SECURITY] from the main
menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a
password is required. Enter the set password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
z
When the password has been changed previously,
enter the changed password, and press the
<ENTER> button.
Note
z
The entered password is displayed with * mark on
the screen.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed
when the power is turned on. When the entered
password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted
to the power standby <
> button, the <SHUTTER>
button, and the <LENS> (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, and
<SHIFT>) buttons.
1) Press

to select [SECURITY
PASSWORD].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [SECURITY
PASSWORD].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [ON]
[OFF]
Disables the security password
entry.
[ON] Enables the security password entry.
Note
z
The [SECURITY PASSWORD] setting is set to
[OFF] at the time of purchase or when all the user
data has been initialized.
z
Change the password periodically that is hard to
guess.
z
The security password will be enabled after setting
[SECURITY PASSWORD] to [ON] and turning the
<MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD
CHANGE]
Change the security password.
1) Press

to select [SECURITY
PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
and the number (<0> to
<9>) buttons to set the password.
z
Up to eight button operations can be set.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) Re-enter the password for the
conrmation.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
The entered password is displayed with * mark on
the screen.
z
An error message is displayed on the screen when
the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the
correct password.
[SECURITY] menu
122 - ENGLISH
Settings
[DISPLAY SETTING]
Overlap the security message (text or image) over the
projecting image.
1) Press

to select [DISPLAY
SETTING].
2) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [DISPLAY
SETTING].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[OFF] [TEXT]
[USER
LOGO]
[OFF] The text display is disabled.
[TEXT] The text display is enabled.
[USER
LOGO]
The picture registered by the user is
projected.
Note
z
To create the image for [USER LOGO], “Logo
Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-
ROM is required.
[TEXT CHANGE]
Change the text displayed when the text display is
enabled by selecting [TEXT] in [DISPLAY SETTING].
1) Press

to select [TEXT CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the text, and
press the <ENTER> button to enter the
text.
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The text is changed.
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
Enable/disable the button operations on the control
panel and the remote control.
1) Press

to select [CONTROL
DEVICE SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select an item.
■
To set [CONTROL PANEL]
z
You can set the limitation on the control from
the control panel.
4) Select [CONTROL PANEL] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CONTROL PANEL] screen is displayed.
6) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [CONTROL
PANEL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ENABLE] [DISABLE] [USER]
[ENABLE]
Enables all button operations from
the projector body.
[DISABLE]
Disables all button operations
from the projector body.
[USER]
Operation of all buttons on the
projector body can be enabled/
disabled separately.
7) Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The conrmation screen is displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
Enabling/disabling any projector body
button
7) Select [USER] in Step 6).
z
Setting items can be selected for the buttons on
the projector body.
[SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 123
Settings
8) Press

to select [POWER
BUTTON], [INPUT SELECT BUTTON],
[MENU BUTTON], [LENS BUTTON],
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON], [SHUTTER
BUTTON], or [OTHER BUTTON].
z
Use the following items to enable/disable
buttons on the projector body.
[POWER
BUTTON]
Power standby <
> button and
power on <
> button
[INPUT SELECT
BUTTON]
<VIDEO> button, <RGB1> button,
<RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button,
<HDMI> button, and <SDI 1/2>
button
[MENU
BUTTON]
<MENU> button
[LENS
BUTTON]
<LENS> button
[AUTO SETUP
BUTTON]
<AUTO SETUP> button
[SHUTTER
BUTTON]
<SHUTTER> button
[OTHER
BUTTON]
󱚣󱚤
buttons, <ENTER>
button
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch between enable/
disable.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ENABLE] [DISABLE]
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
10)
Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The conrmation screen is displayed.
11)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
■
To set [REMOTE CONTROL]
z
You can set the limitation on the control from
the remote control.
4) Select [REMOTE CONTROL] in Step 3).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
6) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch [REMOTE
CONTROL].
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ENABLE] [DISABLE] [USER]
[ENABLE]
Enables all button operations from
the remote control.
[DISABLE]
Disables all button operations
from the remote control.
[USER]
Operation of all buttons on the
remote control can be enabled/
disabled separately.
7) Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The conrmation screen is displayed.
8) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
z
Enabling/disabling any remote control
button
7) Select [USER] in Step 6).
z
Setting items can be selected for the buttons on
the remote control.
8) Press

to select [POWER
BUTTON], [INPUT SELECT BUTTON],
[MENU BUTTON], [LENS BUTTON],
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON], [SHUTTER
BUTTON], [ASPECT BUTTON], [ON
SCREEN BUTTON], or [OTHER
BUTTON].
z
Use the following items to enable/disable
buttons on the remote control.
[POWER
BUTTON]
Power standby <
> button and
power on <
> button
[INPUT SELECT
BUTTON]
<VIDEO> button, <RGB1> button,
<RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button,
<HDMI> button, and <SDI 1/2>
button
[MENU
BUTTON]
<MENU> button
[LENS
BUTTON]
<FOCUS> button, <ZOOM>
button, <SHIFT> button
[AUTO SETUP
BUTTON]
<AUTO SETUP> button
[SHUTTER
BUTTON]
<SHUTTER> button
[ASPECT
BUTTON]
<ASPECT> button
[ON SCREEN
BUTTON]
<ON SCREEN> button
[OTHER
BUTTON]
Buttons not listed above
[SECURITY] menu
124 - ENGLISH
Settings
9) Press
󱚣󱚤
to switch between enable/
disable.
z
The setting will change as follows each time
you press the button.
[ENABLE] [DISABLE]
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
10)
Press

to select [APPLY], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
The conrmation screen is displayed.
11)
Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and press
the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
When a button operation is performed on the
device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE
PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
z
The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen
will disappear when there is no operation for
approximately ten seconds.
z
It will not be possible to turn off the power (standby
status) if the operations of both of [CONTROL
PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to
[DISABLE].
z
When the setting has completed, the menu screen
will disappear. To operate continuously, press the
<MENU> button to display the main menu.
z
Even when button operation on the remote control
is disabled, the <ID SET> button and the <ID ALL>
button are enabled.
[CONTROL DEVICE
PASSWORD CHANGE]
The control device password can be changed.
1) Press

to select [CONTROL
DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD
CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select the text, and
press the <ENTER> button to enter the
text.
4) Press
󱚣󱚤
to select [OK], and
press the <ENTER> button.
z
To cancel, select [CANCEL].
Attention
z
The initial password when used for the rst time or
after initializing all the user data is “AAAA”.
z
Change the password periodically that is hard to
guess.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 125
Settings
[NETWORK] menu
Select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and
select the item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
(
page 61) for the operation of the menu
screen.
z
After selecting the item, press
󱚣󱚤
to set.
[NETWORK SETUP]
Perform the initial setting of the network before using
the network function.
1) Press

to select [NETWORK
SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [NETWORK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press

to select an item, and
change the settings according to the
operation instructions of the menu.
[PROJECTOR
NAME]
Change the setting when using a
DHCP server.
[DHCP]
Set the item to [ON] when using
a DHCP server to automatically
acquire the IP address. Set to [OFF]
when not using a DHCP server.
[IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IP address when not
using a DHCP server.
[SUBNET
MASK]
Enter the subnet mask when not
using a DHCP server.
[DEFAULT
GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address
when not using a DHCP server.
[STORE] Save the current network settings.
4) Press

to select [STORE], and
press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the conrmation is displayed,
select [OK] or [CANCEL], and press
the <ENTER> button.
Note
z
When using a DHCP server, conrm that the DHCP
server is running.
z
Consult your network administrator regarding the IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set up the control method of the network.
1) Press

to select [NETWORK
CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is
displayed.
3) Press

to select an item, and press
󱚣󱚤
to change the setting.
[WEB
CONTROL]
Set to [ON] to control with the Web
browser.
[PJLink
CONTROL]
Set to [ON] to control with the
PJLink protocol.
[COMMAND
CONTROL]
Set to [ON] to control with the
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT>
terminal control command format
(
page 163).
Refer to “Control commands via
LAN” (
page 157).
[COMMAND
PORT]
Set the port number used for
command control.
[STORE]
Save the current network control
settings.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Displays the status of the projector network.
1) Press

to select [NETWORK
STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
z
The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[NETWORK] menu
126 - ENGLISH
Settings
Network connections
The projector has a network function, and the following operations are available from the computer using the Web
control.
z
Setting and adjustment of the projector
z
Display of the projector status
z
Setting of E-mail notication
Note
z
A LAN cable is required to use the network function.
&RPSXWHU
3URMHFWRU
/$1&DEOHVWUDLJKW /$1&DEOHVWUDLJKW
+XE
z
A Web browser is required to use this function. Conrm that the Web browser can be used beforehand.
Compatible OS: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7, Mac OS X v10.4/v10.5/v10.6/v10.7
Compatible browser: Internet Explorer 7.0/8.0/9.0, Safari 4.0/5.0 (Mac OS)
z
Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Conrm that the E-mail can be
used beforehand.
z
Use a LAN cable that is straight-through and compatible with category 5 or higher.
z
Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter length.
■
Name and function of network function parts
(1) (2) (3)
(1) LAN10/100 lamp (yellow)
Lights on when connected to the 100BASE-TX.
(2) <LAN> terminal (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Used to connect the LAN cable here.
(3) LAN LINK/ACT lamp (green)
Lights on when connected.
Flashes when transmitting/receiving data.
Attention
z
When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 127
Settings
Accessing from the Web browser
1) Start up the Web browser on the computer.
2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry eld of the Web browser.
3) Enter the user name and the password.
z
The factory default setting of the user name is user1 (user rights)/admin1 (administrator rights) and the
password is panasonic (lower case).
4) Click OK.
z
The [Projector status] page is displayed.
Note
z
If you use a Web browser to control the projector, set [WEB CONTROL] to [ON] in [NETWORK CONTROL]
(
page 125).
z
Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple Web browsers. Do not set or control the
projector from multiple computers.
z
Change the password rst.(
page 140)
z
The administrator rights allows to use all functions. The user rights allow use of [Projector status] (
page 128),
confirmation of the error information page (
page 129), [Network status] (
page 130), [Basic control] (
page 132),
and [Change password] (
page 140) only.
z
Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
[NETWORK] menu
128 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
Descriptions of items
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Page tab
Switches pages by clicking it.
(2) [Status]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking
this item.
(3) [Projector control]
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking
this item.
(4) [Detailed set up]
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking
this item.
(5) [Change password]
The [Change password] page is displayed by clicking
this item.
■
[Projector status] page
Click [Status] → [Projector status].
Displays the status of the projector for the following items.
(10)
(11)
(12)
(15)
(16)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(14)
(1) [PROJECTOR TYPE]
Displays the type of the projector.
(2) [MAIN VERSION]
Displays the rmware version of the projector.
(3) [POWER]
Displays the status of the power.
(4) [SHUTTER]
Displays the status of the projector.
(5) [SERIAL NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the projector.
(6) [NETWORK VERSION]
Displays the version of the rmware of the network.
(7) [REMOTE2 STATUS]
Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN>
terminal.
(8) [OSD]
Displays the status of the on-screen display.
(9) [LAMP SELECT]
Displays the setting status of [LAMP SELECT]
(
page 100).
(10) [INPUT]
Displays the status of the input selection.
(11) [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the air intake temperature of
the projector.
(12) [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the internal temperature of
the projector.
(13) [AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the temperature around the
lamp of the projector.
(14) [LAMP1][LAMP2][LAMP3][LAMP4][RUNTIME]
Displays the status and the usage time of the lamp.
(15) [SELF TEST]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
(16) [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Displays the operation times of the projector.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 129
Settings
■
Error information page
When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the self-diagnosis display of the [Projector status]
screen, click it to display the error/warning details.
z
The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the
error.
[OK]: Normal operation
[FAILED]: Occurrence of trouble
[WARNING]: Warning
z
Description of problem occurrence [FAILED]:
Parameter Description
[MAIN CPU BUS]
There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your
dealer.
[FAN]
There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit. Consult your
dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
The air intake temperature is too high. It may be used in an operating
environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating
appliance.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
The temperature inside the projector is high. It may be used in an
operating environment where the temperature is high, such as near
a heating appliance.
[AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the lamp is high. The air exhaust port may
be blocked.
[LAMP1 REMAIN TIME]
The usage time of the lamp has exceeded the specied time, and it
is time to replace the lamp.
[LAMP2 REMAIN TIME]
[LAMP3 REMAIN TIME]
[LAMP4 REMAIN TIME]
[LAMP1 STATUS]
The lamp has failed to turn on. Wait a while until the luminous lamp
cools off, and then turn on the power.
[LAMP2 STATUS]
[LAMP3 STATUS]
[LAMP4 STATUS]
[APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)]
There is a problem in the contrast shutter circuit for dynamic iris.
Consult your dealer.
[SHUTTER(MUTE-SHUTTER)] There is a problem with the shutter circuitry. Consult your dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake air
temperature. Consult your dealer.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect temperature inside
the projector. Consult your dealer.
[NETWORK] menu
130 - ENGLISH
Settings
Parameter Description
[AROUND LAMP TEMP. SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air
temperature. Consult your dealer.
[BATTERY] The battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
[LENS MOUNTER] There is a problem in the lens mounter. Consult your dealer.
[BRIGHTNESS SENSOR]
There is a problem with the luminance sensor. If the problem is not
corrected by turning off the power and turning it on again, consult
your dealer.
[ANGLE SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor that detects angle. Consult your
dealer.
[FILTER UNIT]
The air lter unit is not attached. Check the connection of the air lter
unit. (
page 146)
[AIR FILTER]
There are too much dust accumulated in the air lter unit.
Turn off the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (
page 51), and
clean the air lter (
page 144).
[AC POWER]
AC input voltage is weak. Use electric wiring that can sufciently
withstand the power consumption of the projector.
■
[Network status] page
Click [Status] → [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 131
Settings
■
[Access error log] page
Click [Status] → [Access error log].
The error log on the WEB server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with
unauthorized user names or passwords.
■
[Access log] page
Click [Status] → [Access log].
The log such as user name accessed to the WEB control page, accessed IP address, accessed time is
displayed.
Note
z
[Access error log]/[Access log] will display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. May be unable to
display all information when many accesses/requests are made at one time.
z
When [Access error log]/[Access log] exceeds a certain amount, old information will be erased.
z
Conrm [Access error log]/[Access log] periodically.
[NETWORK] menu
132 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
[Basic control] page
Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(1) [POWER]
Switches the power on/off.
(2) [SHUTTER]
Switches between use or not use of the shutter
function.
(3) [OSD]
Switches between on (display)/off (no display) of the
on-screen display function.
(4) [SYSTEM]
Switches the system method.
(5) [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
■
[Detail control] page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Control of the projector
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in
the same way as the buttons on the remote control.
(2) [SUB MEMORY]
Switches the sub memory.
(3) [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches to system daylight view settings.
(4) [FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image.
(5) [P IN P]
Switches the P IN P setting.
(6) [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] (PT-DZ21KE and
PT-DS20KE only)
Switches the ip horizontal settings.
(7) [WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
(8) [LENS]
Adjusts the projection lens.
(9) [TEST PATTERN]
Displays the test pattern.
(10) [GET OSD]
Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the
right of the control page.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 133
Settings
■
[Network cong] page
Click [Detailed set up] → [Network cong].
z
Click [Network cong] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
z
Click [Next] to display the current settings.
z
Click [Change] to display the following setting change screen.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) [PROJECTOR NAME]
Enter the name of the projector. Also enter the host
name if it is required when using a DHCP server, etc.
(2) [DHCP ON]/[DHCP OFF]
To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP
ON].
(3) [IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.
(4) [SUBNET MASK]
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP
server.
(5) [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address when not using a
DHCP server.
(6) [DNS1]
Enter the DNS 1 server address.
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS 1 server
address (primary):
Numbers (0 to 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.253)
(7) [DNS2]
Enter the DNS 2 server address.
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS 2 server
address (secondary):
Numbers (0 to 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.254)
(8) [Back]/[Next]
Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen.
[Next]The current settings are displayed by pressing
the button. Click the [Submit] button to update the
settings.
Note
z
When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired”
may appear. In that case, click [Network cong] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
[NETWORK] menu
134 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
[Adjust clock] page
Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) [Time Zone]
Selects the time zone.
(2) [Set time zone]
Updates the time zone setting.
(3) [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]
Set to [ON] to adjust the date and time automatically.
(4) [NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP
server when you set to adjust the date and time
manually.
(To enter the server name, the setup of the DNS
server is required.)
(5) [Date]
Enter the date to be changed.
(6) [Time]
Enter the time to be changed.
(7) [Set date and time]
Updates the date and time settings.
Note
z
The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after
correcting the time. Please consult your dealer.
■
[Ping test] page
You can check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) [Input IP address]
Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
(2) [Submit]
Executes the connection test.
(3) Example of display when the connection has
succeeded
(4) Example of display when the connection has
failed
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 135
Settings
■
[E-mail set up] page
E-mail address set in advance for use when there is a problem or when the usage time of a lamp reaches a
set value.
E-mail can be sent to (maximum two locations).
Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) [ENABLE]
Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function.
(2) [SMTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail
server (SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS
server settings are required.
(3) [MAIL FROM]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63
characters in single byte)
(4) [MEMO]
You can enter information such as the location of the
projector that noties the sender of the E-mail. (Up to
63 characters in single byte)
(5) [MINIMUM TIME]
Change the minimum interval for the temperature
warning mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this
case, another E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes
after sending the temperature warning mail even if it
reaches the warning temperature.
(6) [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Change the temperature setting for the temperature
warning mail. A temperature warning mail is sent
when the temperature exceeds this value.
(8)
(7)
(7) [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1]
Enter the E-mail address to be sent.
(8) Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Select the conditions to send E-mail.
[MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
An E-mail message is sent when an error
occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[LAMP1 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 1 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP2 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 2 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP3 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 3 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP4 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 4 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
An E-mail message is sent when the air intake
temperature has reached the value set at the
above eld.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this when E-mail is to be
sent periodically.
It will be sent on the days and time with the check
mark.
[NETWORK] menu
136 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
[E-mail set up] page (continued)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]
Enter the E-mail address to be sent when two E-mail
addresses are to be used.
Leave it blank when two E-mail addresses are not to
be used.
(2) Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Select the conditions to send E-mail to the second
E-mail address.
[MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
An E-mail message is sent when an error
occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[LAMP1 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 1 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP2 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 2 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP3 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 3 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[LAMP4 RUNTIME]:
An E-mail message is sent when the remaining
lamp on time for the lamp 4 has reached the
value set at the right eld.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
An E-mail message is sent when the air intake
temperature has reached the value set at the
above eld.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this when E-mail is to be
sent periodically.
It will be sent on the days and time with the check
mark.
(3) [Submit]
Update the settings.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 137
Settings
■
[Authentication set up] page
You can set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send
an E-mail message.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) [Auth]
Select the authentication method specied by your
Internet service provider.
(2) [SMTP Auth]
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.
(3) [POP server name]
Enter the POP server name. (Up to 63 characters in
single byte)
Allowed characters:
Alphanumerics (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9)
Minus sign (-) and period (.)
(4) [User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP
server. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)
(5) [Password]
Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP
server. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)
(6) [SMTP server port]
Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
(Normally 25)
(7) [POP server port]
Enter the port number of the POP server.
(Normally 110)
(8) [Submit]
Update the settings.
[NETWORK] menu
138 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
Contents of mail sent
z
Example of E-mail sent when E-mail is set
The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 139
Settings
z
Example of the E-mail sent for an error
The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
[NETWORK] menu
140 - ENGLISH
Settings
■
User name [Change password] page
Click [Change password].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) [Administrator]
Used to change the setting of the [Administrator].
(2) [User]
Used to change the setting of the [User].
(3) [Next]
Used to change the setting of the password.
z
[Administrator] account
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) [Account]
Displays the account to change.
(2) [Current][User name]
Enter the user name before the change.
(3) [Current][Password]
Enter the current password.
(4) [New][User name]
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16
characters in single byte)
(5) [New][Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters
in single byte)
(6) [New][Password(Retype)]
Enter the desired new password again.
(7) [OK]
Determines the change of password.
[NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 141
Settings
z
[User] account
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) [Account]
Displays the account to change.
(2) [New][User name]
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16
characters in single byte)
(3) [New][Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters
in single byte)
(4) [New][Password(Retype)]
Enter the desired new password again.
(5) [OK]
Determines the change of password.
z
[Change password] (For user rights)
Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(1) [Old Password]
Enter the current password.
(2) [New Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16
characters in single byte)
(3) [Retype]
Enter the desired new password again.
(4) [OK]
Determines the change of password.
Note
z
To change the account of the administrator, you must enter the [Current] [User name] and [Password].
Lamp/Temperature/Filter Indicators
142 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
Lamp/Temperature/Filter Indicators
Managing the indicated problems
If a problem should occur inside the projector, the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4>, the
temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the lter indicator <FILTER> will inform you by lighting or ashing.
Check the status of the indicators and manage the indicated problems as follows.
Attention
z
When switching off the power to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the
projector” (
page 51).
Note
z
Check the status of the power supply with the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>. (
page 49)
/DPSLQGLFDWRU/$03!
3RZHULQGLFDWRU
21*67$1'%<5!
/DPSLQGLFDWRU/$03!
/DPSLQGLFDWRU/$03!
/DPSLQGLFDWRU/$03!
7HPSHUDWXUHLQGLFDWRU7(03!
)LOWHULQGLFDWRU),/7(5!
■
Lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4>
Indicator
status
Illuminating red
Flashing red
(1 time)
Flashing red
(3 times)
Problem
Time to replace the lamp
unit. (
page 148)
The lamp unit or the lamp
case is not installed.
A problem is detected in the lamp or
the power supply for the lamp.
Cause
z
Is [REPLACE LAMP]
displayed when you
turned on the power?
z
This indicator lights up
when the cumulative
operating time of the
lamp unit has reached
1 800 hours.
z
Is the lamp unit or the lamp
case installed?
z
Have you
turned on the
power again
immediately
after turning it
off?
z
Some error
has arisen
in the lamp
circuit. Check
for uctuation
(or drop) in the
source voltage.
Solution
z
Replace the lamp unit.
z
Install the lamp unit or
the lamp case if it is not
installed.
z
If the indicator is still
blinking in red despite
having installed the lamp
unit or the lamp case,
consult your dealer.
z
Wait a while
until the
luminous lamp
cools off, and
then turn on
the power.
z
Turn the <MAIN
POWER>
switch to
<OFF>
(
page 51), and
consult your
dealer.
Note
z
If the lamp indicator <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4> is still lit or ashing after taking the preceding
measures, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
Lamp/Temperature/Filter Indicators
ENGLISH - 143
Maintenance
■
Temperature indicator<TEMP>
Indicator
status
Lighting in red
Flashing in red
(2 times)
Flashing in red
(3 times)
Status Warm-up status
Internal
temperature
is high.
(WARNING)
Internal temperature is high
(standby mode)
The cooling fan has
stopped.
Cause
z
Did you turn on the
power when the
room temperature
was about 0°C
(32°F)?
z
Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?
z
Is the room temperature high?
z
Is the lter indicator <FILTER> not lit?
―
Solution
z
Wait at least ve
minutes in the
current status.
z
Install the unit
in a location
with an ambient
temperature of
0°C (32°F) to 45°C
(113°F)
*1
.
z
Remove any objects that are blocking the air
intake/exhaust port.
z
Move the projector to a location with an
ambient temperature of 0°C (32°F) to 45°C
(113°F)
*1
and a humidity of 20% to 80% (no
condensation).
z
Clean the air filter unit or replace it. (
page 144)
z
Turn the <MAIN
POWER> switch to
<OFF> (
page 51),
and consult your
dealer.
*1: When using the projector at high elevations (1 400 m (4 593 ft) – 2 700 m (8 858 ft) above sea level), the operating environment
temperature will be 5°C (41°F) lower than the maximum limit.
When using a smoke cut lter, the temperature will be 0°C (32°F) to 35°C (95°F). However, it cannot be used at high elevations.
Note
z
If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or ashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer
to repair the unit.
■
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicator
status
Lighting in red Flashing in red
Status
The lter is clogged.
The temperature inside or outside the projector is abnormally high.
The air lter unit is not
attached.
Cause
z
Is the air lter unit
dirty?
z
Is the air intake/
exhaust port
blocked?
z
Is [HIGH ALTITUDE
MODE] set
correctly?
z
Is the air lter unit
attached?
Solution
z
Clean the air lter
unit or replace it.
(
page 144)
z
Remove any objects
that are blocking the
air intake/exhaust
port.
z
When using the
projector at high
elevations 1 400 m
(4 593 ft) – 2 700 m
(8 858 ft) sea
level, set [HIGH
ALTITUDE MODE]
(
page 100) to [ON].
z
Do not use the
projector at high
elevations 2 700 m
(8 858 ft) or higher
above sea level.
z
Attach the air lter
unit.
Note
z
If the lter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or ashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer to
repair the unit.
z
If the lter is clogged, only one lamp may light even when [LAMP SELECT] is set to [QUAD], [TRIPLE], or
[DUAL]. Cleaning the air lter unit or replacing it with a new one will turn off the indicator.
Maintenance/replacement
144 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
Maintenance/replacement
Before maintaining/replacing the unit
z
Make sure to turn off the power before maintaining or replacing the unit. (
pages 48, 51)
z
When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector” (
page 51).
Maintenance
■
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
z
If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector
with a dry cloth.
z
Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may
deteriorate the outer case and peel off the paint.
z
When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
■
Lens
If dirt or dust accumulates on the surface of the lens, it will be enlarged and projected onto the screen.
Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
z
Do not use a cloth that is uffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
z
Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
z
The lens is made of glass. Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface. Please handle with
care.
■
Air lter unit
Perform maintenance of the air lter unit in the following cases.
z
The air lter is clogged with dust, causing the lter replacement message to appear on the screen and the
lter indicator <FILTER> to light in red.
1) Remove the air lter cover.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the air lter cover screw counterclockwise until it turns freely, and then
remove the air lter cover.
Air filter cover fixing screw
Air filter cover
2) Pull out the air lter unit.
z
Remove the air lter unit frame at the front side (with the lens) from the tab of the projector body while
slightly pressing the center and pull out in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the frame at the
opposite side from the tab.
z
After pulling out the air lter unit, remove large foreign objects and dust from the air lter unit compartment
and the air intake port of the projector body if there are any.
Tabs on the
projector body
Tabs on the
projector body
A
ir filter unit compartment and
the projector’s air intake port
Air filter unit
Attention
z
Take care not to touch the radiator n when removing dirt or dust.
Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 145
Maintenance
3) Clean and dry the air lter unit.
z
Cleaning the air lter unit
(i) Soak the air lter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it.

Do not use cleaning tools such as brushes.

When rinsing, hold the frame of the air lter unit without putting strong pressure on the lter unit.
(ii) Rinse the unit two to three times using fresh water each time.

Insufcient rinsing may result in odors.
z
Drying the air lter unit
• Let the unit naturally dry off in a well-ventilated place where there is little dust and the unit is protected
from direct sunlight.
• Do not dry using drying devices such as dryers.
4) Attach the air lter unit to the projector.
z
The air lter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air lter with the grooves on the projector body.
z
Hook the air lter unit frame at the exhaust port side to the two tabs of the back side of the projector’s air
lter unit compartment and perform Step 2) in the reverse order to attach.
• Conrm that the tabs of the air lter unit compartment of the projector body are hooked to the air lter unit
frame.
Tabs on the projector body
Tabs on the projector body
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Groove on the projector body
Groove on the projector body
5) Attach the air lter cover to the projector and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten
the air lter cover screw.
z
Perform Step 1) in the reverse order.
Attention
z
After washing the air lter unit, dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector. Attaching a wet unit
will cause an electric shock or malfunction.
z
Do not disassemble the air lter unit.
Maintenance/replacement
146 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
Note
z
Take care not to touch the radiator n when removing dirt or dust.
z
Make sure that the air lter unit is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not properly attached, the
projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction.

If you use the projector without attaching the air lter unit, the message appears on the projection screen for
approximately 30 seconds.
z
Replace the air lter unit with a replacement lter unit (Model No.: ET-EMF510) if it is damaged or if the dirt
does not come off even after washing.
z
Air lter replacement is recommended after cleaning the unit two times.
z
The dust-proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning.
Replacing the unit
■
Air lter unit
If dirt does not come off even if the unit is maintained, it is time for the unit to be replaced.
The replacement lter unit (Model No.: ET-EMF510) is an optional accessory. To purchase the product,
consult your dealer.
■
Replacement of the air lter unit
Attention
z
Make sure to turn off the power before replacing the air lter unit.
z
When replacing the unit, make sure that the projector is stable. Perform the replacement in a safe place where
the projector will not be damaged even if you drop the air lter unit.
1) Remove the air lter cover.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the air lter cover screw counterclockwise until it turns freely, and then
remove the air lter cover.
Air filter cover fixing screw
Air filter cover
2) Pull out the air lter unit.
z
Remove the air lter unit frame at the front side (with the lens) from the tab of the projector body while
slightly pressing the center and pull out in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the frame at the
opposite side from the tab.
z
After pulling out the air lter unit, remove large foreign objects and dust from the air lter unit compartment
and the air intake port of the projector body if there are any.
Tabs on the
projector body
Tabs on the
projector body
A
ir filter unit compartment and
the projector’s air intake port
Air filter unit
Attention
z
Take care not to touch the radiator n when removing dirt or dust.
Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 147
Maintenance
3) Attach the replacement lter unit optional accessory (Model No.: ET-EMF510) to the
projector.
z
The air lter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air lter with the grooves on the projector body.
z
Hook the air lter unit frame at the exhaust port side to the two tabs of the back side of the projector’s air
lter unit compartment and perform Step 2) in the reverse order to attach.
• Conrm that the tabs of the air lter unit compartment of the projector body are hooked to the air lter unit
frame.
Tabs on the projector body
Tabs on the projector body
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Groove on the projector body
Groove on the projector body
4) Attach the air lter cover to the projector and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten
the air lter cover screw.
z
Perform Step 1) in the reverse order.
Attention
z
When switching on the projector, make sure that the air lter unit is installed. If it is not properly attached, the
projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction.

If you use the projector without attaching the air lter unit, the message appears on the projection screen for
approximately 30 seconds.
Note
z
The replacement cycle of the air lter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
■
Lamp unit
The lamp unit is a consumable component. See “When to replace the lamp unit” (
page 148) for details about
the replacement cycle.
Consult your dealer to purchase a replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD510 (1 bulb), ET-LAD510F (4 bulbs)).
It is recommended that you request a qualied technician to replace the lamp unit. Consult your dealer.
Attention
z
Do not replace the lamp unit when it is hot. (Wait at least one hour after use.)
■
Checking the lamp unit to be replaced
Check the status of the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4>.
z
The lamp unit corresponding to the lamp indicator that is lit in red is required to be replaced.
■
Notes on the replacement of the lamp unit
z
A Phillips screwdriver is necessary when replacing the lamp unit.
z
Since the luminous lamp is made of glass, it may burst if dropped or hit with a hard object.
Please handle with care.
z
Do not disassemble or modify the lamp unit.
z
When replacing the lamp unit, be sure to hold it by the handle because its surface is pointed and its shape
is protruded.
z
The lamp may be burst. Replace the lamp unit carefully so that the broken pieces of the lamp glass will not
scatter. When the projector is mounted on the ceiling, do not make the replacement directly under the lamp
unit or put your face near it.
z
The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for
correct methods of disposal.
Attention
z
Use only specied lamp units.
Note
z
The model numbers of accessories and optional components are subject to change without notice.
Maintenance/replacement
148 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
■
When to replace the lamp unit
The lamp unit is a consumable component. Since its brightness gradually decreases over time, it is necessary
to replace it regularly. The estimated duration before replacement is 2 000 hours. However, this may be
shortened depending on individual lamp characteristics, usage conditions, and the installation environment.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that a replacement lamp unit be prepared. The unit can damage the
projector if it has not been replaced after 2 000 hours of usage. Thus, the lamp automatically turns off after
approximately ten minutes.
If the cumulative operating time of all 4 lamp unit bulbs exceeds 2 000 hours, the power will be switch off after
about 10 minutes.
On-screen display Lamp indicator
Over 1 800 hours
The message is displayed for 30 seconds.
Pressing any button on the control panel
or remote control within 30 seconds will
clear the message.
Lights in red even during the standby
mode.
Over 2 000 hours
The message remains displayed until you
press a button.
Note
z
To predict when to replace the lamp, check the lamp cumulative operating hours displayed in [LAMP1] - [LAMP4]
(
page 109) of [STATUS].
z
The usage period of 2 000 hours is a rough estimate and is not guaranteed.
■
Replacing the lamp unit
Attention
z
When the projector is mounted on the ceiling, do not perform tasks while your face is near the lamp unit.
z
Do not remove or loosen the screws other than specied ones when replacing the lamp.
1) Set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet.
z
Wait at least one hour and and check if the lamp unit has cooled down.
2) Remove the lamp unit cover.
(i) Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the lamp unit cover xing screw (one screw) counterclockwise until
it turns freely, and then open the lamp unit cover slowly in the direction of the arrow described in the
following gure.

Opening the lamp unit cover quickly may result in damage to the cover.

If you loosen the lamp unit cover xing screw with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction,
the lamp unit cover may open on its weight and drop off the lamp unit.
(ii) Hold the lamp unit cover securely and slide it in the direction of the arrow, and then pull it out backward
to remove.
Lamp unit cover
fixing screw
Lamp unit cover
Attention
z
Be careful to hold the lamp unit cover and to loosen the lamp unit
cover xing screws with the projector installed upward in the vertical
direction since the lamp unit cover may open and the lamp case may
drop off on its weight.

This can cause severe injury or accidents.
REPLACE LAMP
Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 149
Maintenance
3) Pull out the lamp case.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp case xing screws of the lamp unit to be replaced (two screws
each) counterclockwise until they turn freely, and then hold the lamp case handles to be replaced and pull
out backward.
z
Do not remove the black screws other than the lamp case xing screws.
z
When you loosen the lamp case xing screws with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction,
the lamp case may drop off on its weight. Be sure to hold the lamp case handle when you loosen the lamp
case xing screws.
z
When removing the lamp case, make sure that the projector is stable and remove it in a safe place where
the lamp case is dropped off.
Lamp case handles
Lamp case L
Lamp case R
Lamp case fixing screws
/DPSXQLW
/DPSXQLW
/DPSFDVH5
/DPSFDVH/
/DPSXQLW
/DPSXQLW
4) Remove the lamp unit.
z
Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit xing screws (two screws) counterclockwise until they turn
freely, and then remove the lamp unit from the lamp case.
z
Hold the handles of the lamp unit and remove it.
z
Do not remove the screws other than the lamp unit xing screws.
Lamp unit fixing screws
Lamp unit
Lamp case handle
Lamp unit
handles
Guide pins and guide holes
Lamp unit
5) Attach the lamp unit.
(i) Gently push the new lamp unit into the lamp case. Install the new lamp unit carefully so that the guide
pins on the lamp case are inserted into the guide holes on the lamp unit.

If the lamp unit is not installed properly, remove it and then gently install it again. Pushing it in forcibly
or exerting excessive force may break the connector.
(ii) Use a Phillips screwdriver to rmly tighten the lamp unit xing screws (two screws each).
z
Make sure to attach the lamp unit properly.
Maintenance/replacement
150 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
6) Attach the lamp case.
z
Gently push in the lamp case along the grooves for the lamp case attachment guide on the projector, and
then rmly tighten the lamp case xing screws (two screws).
z
When you secure the lamp case with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction, the lamp case
may drop off on its weight. Be sure to hold the lamp case handle when you tighten the lamp case xing
screws.
z
If the lamp case is not installed properly, remove it and then gently install it again. Pushing it in forcibly or
exerting excessive force may break the connector.
z
Make sure to attach the lamp case properly.
Grooves of the guide to attach the lamp case
Guides to attach the lamp case
Lamp case handles
Lamp case L
Lamp case R
Lamp case fixing screws
7) Attach the lamp unit cover.
(i) Align the lamp unit cover to the marks of (a) and (b) ( and ) to attach as shown by the arrow.
(ii) Close the lamp unit cover in the direction of the arrow and use a Phillips screw driver to rmly tighten
the lamp unit cover xing screw (one screw).
z
Make sure to attach the lamp unit cover properly.
D
E
L
LL
Note
z
When you place the new lamp unit, the projector resets the total usage time of the lamp unit automatically.
z
When the lamp case is removed or attached, it will be caught because of the fall-prevention stopper. This,
however, is not a problem.
Troubleshooting
ENGLISH - 151
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems Points to be checked Page
Power does not turn
on.
z
Is the power plug rmly inserted into the outlet? ―
z
Is the <MAIN POWER> switch turned <OFF>? 51
z
Is the wall outlet supplying electricity? ―
z
Have the circuit breakers tripped? ―
z
Is the temperature indicator <TEMP> or the lamp indicators
<LAMP1>/<LAMP2>/<LAMP3>/<LAMP4> lit or ashing?
142, 143
z
Is the lamp unit cover securely installed? 148
z
Are you using the correct power supply voltage (AC 200 - 240 V)? 172
No image appears.
z
Are connections to external devices correctly performed? 44
z
Is the input selection setting correct? 58
z
Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum? 66
z
Is the external device that is connected to the projector working
properly?
―
z
Is the shutter function in use? 58
z
If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is ashing in red, consult
your dealer.
—
z
Is the lens cover still attached to the lens? 50
The picture is fuzzy.
z
Is the lens focus set correctly? 52
z
Is the projection distance appropriate? 29
z
Is the lens dirty? 18
z
Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?
―
The color is pale or
grayish.
z
Is the [COLOR] adjusted correctly? 66
z
Is the [TINT] adjusted correctly? 66
z
Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly? 44
z
Is the RGB cable damaged? ―
The remote control
does not respond.
z
Are the batteries depleted? ―
z
Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly? 27
z
Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the
projector’s remote control signal receiver?
23
z
Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range? 23
z
Are other forms of light, such as uorescent light, affecting the
projection?
23
z
Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set
to [DISABLE]?
122
z
Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 164
z
Is the ID number setting operation correct? 27
Troubleshooting
152 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
Problems Points to be checked Page
The menu screen
does not appear.
z
Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?
25, 58
The buttons on the
control panel do not
operate.
z
Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
122
z
Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 164
The image does not
display correctly.
z
Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly? 70
z
Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources? ―
z
Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 167
Image from a
computer does not
appear.
z
Is the cable too long? (Use D-Sub cables that are 10 m (32'10") or
shorter.)
―
z
Is the external video output of the laptop computer set correctly?

Example: The external output settings may be switched by pressing
“Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10” keys simultaneously. Since the method
varies depending on the computer type, refer to the user manual
provided with your computer.
―
Image from a
computer’s DVI-D
output does not
appear.
z
Is the [DVI-D IN] setting set to [EDID3]/[EDID2:PC]? 92
z
The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated
to the latest version.
―
z
The computer may need to be restarted after performing [DVI-D IN]
settings.
92
Video from HDMI
compatible device
does not appear or it
appears jumbled.
z
Is the HDMI cable connected securely? 44
z
Turn the power of the projector and the external device on and off. ―
z
Is an unsupported signal being used?
167
Attention
z
If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
Self-diagnosis display
ENGLISH - 153
Maintenance
Self-diagnosis display
A self-diagnosis display which automatically displays errors and warnings, and their details, is placed on the side
of the projector. (
page 25)
Self-diagnosis
display
Details Measure
U04 Air lter clog
z
Clean the air lter unit.
U11 Intake temperature warning
z
The ambient temperature is too high.U12 Optical module temperature warning
U13
Lamp surrounding temperature warning
U14 Low temperature warning
z
The ambient temperature is too low.
U21 Intake temperature error
z
The ambient temperature is too high.U22 Optical module temperature error
U23 Lamp surrounding temperature error
U24 Low temperature error
z
The ambient temperature is too low.
U30
Installation angle error
z
Do not use the projector tilted at an angle that exceeds
±15° from the horizontal plane.
U41
Lamp 1 cumulative operation time error
z
It’s time to replace the lamp unit. Replace the lamp
unit.
U42
Lamp 2 cumulative operation time error
U43
Lamp 3 cumulative operation time error
U44
Lamp 4 cumulative operation time error
U51 Lamp 1 error
z
Failed to light the lamp. Switch the power on again
after letting the lamp cool down. If the lamp still doesn’t
light up, consult your dealer.
U52 Lamp 2 error
U53 Lamp 3 error
U54 Lamp 4 error
U61
The cumulative operation time of
Lamp 1 has exceeded 2 000 hours
z
The lamp unit’s replacement period has been
exceeded. Replace the unit immediately.
U62
The cumulative operation time of
Lamp 2 has exceeded 2 000 hours
U63
The cumulative operation time of
Lamp 3 has exceeded 2 000 hours
U64
The cumulative operation time of
Lamp 4 has exceeded 2 000 hours
U71 Lamp 1 not installed
z
Attach the lamp unit.
U72 Lamp 2 not installed
U73 Lamp 3 not installed
U74 Lamp 4 not installed
U76 Air lter unit not installed
z
Attach the air lter unit.
U78 Clog sensor error
z
Clean the air lter unit or replace it. (
page 144)
U81
Low AC voltage warning (below 170 V)
z
The power voltage input is low. Dedicate an outlet
for the electrical wiring for the projector’s power
consumption.
H01
Battery replacement for the internal clock
z
Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
H11 Intake temperature sensor not present
z
When the display does not clear even after switching
the main power on and off, consult your dealer.
H12
Optical module temperature sensor
not present
H13
Lamp surrounding temperature sensor
not present
H18 Clog sensor not present
Self-diagnosis display
154 - ENGLISH
Maintenance
Self-diagnosis
display
Details Measure
F00 Liquid cooling pump R warning
z
When the display does not clear even after switching
the main power on and off, consult your dealer.
F01 Liquid cooling pump G warning
F02 Liquid cooling pump B warning
F11 Shutter error
F12 Dynamic iris error
F13 Air lter unit error
F15 Luminance sensor error
F16 Angle sensor error
F41 Lamp 1 memory error
z
The lamp unit is broken. Consult your dealer.
F42 Lamp 2 memory error
F43 Lamp 3 memory error
F44 Lamp 4 memory error
F50 Exhaust fan 1 warning
z
When the display does not clear even after switching
the main power on and off, consult your dealer.
F51 Exhaust fan 2 warning
F52 Exhaust fan 3 warning
F53 Exhaust fan 4 warning
F54 Intake fan 1 warning
F55 Intake fan 2 warning
F56 Lamp 1 fan warning
F57 Lamp 2 fan warning
F58 Lamp 3 fan warning
F59 Lamp 4 fan warning
F61 Lamp 1 power transmission error
F62 Lamp 2 power transmission error
F63 Lamp 3 power transmission error
F64 Lamp 4 power transmission error
F70 Lamp 1 power supply fan warning
F71 Lamp 2 power supply fan warning
F72 Power supply fan warning
F73 Signal fan warning
F74 Lamp 1/2 relay fan warning
F75 Lamp 3/4 relay fan warning
F76 Color prism fan 1 warning
F77 Color prism fan 2 warning
F78 Color prism fan 3 warning
F91 FPGA 1/2 conguration error
F92 FPGA 3 conguration error
F96 Lens mounter error
F97
Geometric adjustment board
communication error
Self-diagnosis display
ENGLISH - 155
Maintenance
Self-diagnosis
display
Details Measure
F98
Geometric distortion correction board
communication error
z
When the display does not clear even after switching
the main power on and off, consult your dealer.
F99 Internal error
FE0 Internal error
FE1 Exhaust fan 1 error
FE2 Exhaust fan 2 error
FE3 Exhaust fan 3 error
FE4 Exhaust fan 4 error
FE5 Intake fan 1 error
FE6 Intake fan 2 error
FE7 Lamp 1 fan error
FE8 Lamp 2 fan error
FE9 Lamp 3 fan error
FF0 Lamp 4 fan error
FF1 Lamp 1/2 power supply fan error
FF2 Lamp 3/4 power supply fan error
FF3 Power supply fan error
FF4 Signal fan error
FF5 Lamp 1/2 relay fan error
FF6 Lamp 3/4 relay fan error
FF7 Color prism fan 1 error
FF8 Color prism fan 2 error
FF9 Color prism fan 3 error
FJ0 Liquid cooling pump R error
FJ1 Liquid cooling pump G error
FJ2 Liquid cooling pump B error
Note
z
The self-diagnosis display and the details of the malfunction may vary.
Technical information
156 - ENGLISH
Appendix
Technical information
PJLink protocol
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1, and the PJLink protocol can be used to
perform projector setting and projector status query operations from a computer.
■
Control commands
The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
Command
Control details Remark
POWR Power supply control
Parameters
0 = Standby
1 = Power on
POWR? Power supply status query
Parameters
0 = Standby
2 = Preparing to switch off
the projector
1 = Power on
3 = Warm-up in progress
INPT Input selection
Parameters
11=RGB1
31=DVI-D
12=RGB2
32=HDMI
21=VIDEO
33=SDI 1 (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
34=SDI 2 (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
INPT? Input selection query
AVMT Shutter control Parameters
30 = shutter function off (picture mute canceled)
31 = shutter function on (picture mute)
AVMT? Shutter status query
ERST? Error status query
Parameters
1st byte: Indicates fan errors, range 0 - 2
2nd byte: Indicates lamp errors, range 0 - 2
3rd byte: Indicates temperature errors, range 0 - 2
4th byte: Fixed to 0
5th byte: Indicates lter errors, range 0 - 2
6th byte: Indicates other errors, range 0 - 2
Denitions for each value from 0 to 2 are as follows
0 = No error is detected 1 = Warning 2 = Error
LAMP? Lamp status query
Parameters
1st digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 1 cumulative operating time
2nd digit: 0 = Lamp 1 off, 1 = Lamp 1 on
3rd digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 2 cumulative operating time
4th digit: 0 = Lamp 2 off, 1 = Lamp 2 on
5th digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 3 cumulative operating time
6th digit: 0 = Lamp 3 off, 1 = Lamp 3 on
7th digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 4 cumulative operating time
8th digit: 0 = Lamp 4 off, 1 = Lamp 4 on
INST? Input selection list query
Parameters are returned with the following values.
“11 12 21 31 32” (only for PT-DW17KE)
“11 12 21 31 32 33 34” (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
NAME? Projector name query
Returns the name set in [PROJECTOR NAME] of [NETWORK
SETUP].
INF1? Manufacturer name query Returns “Panasonic”.
INF2? Model name query Returns “DZ21KE”, “DS20KE”, “DW17KE”.
INF0? Other information queries Returns information such as version number.
CLSS? Class information query Returns “1”.
Technical information
ENGLISH - 157
Appendix
■
PJLink security authentication
The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for Web control.
When using the projector without security authentication, do not set a password for Web control.
z
For specications regarding PJLink, refer to the Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association website.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Control commands via LAN
■
When Web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)
z
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial setting value = 1024) of the projector
and request for a connection to the projector.
You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK STATUS]
Port number
Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND
PORT]
2) Check the response from the projector
Response data
Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section
Termination
symbol
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘1’
0x31
‘ ’
0x20
“zzzzzzzz”
(ASCII code hexadecimal
number)
(CR)
0x0d
9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte
Mode: 1 = Protect mode
3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
“xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx Administrator rights user name for Web control (default user name is “admin1”)
yyyyy Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “panasonic”)
zzzzzzzz 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Technical information
158 - ENGLISH
Appendix
z
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Hash value
(“Connecting” (
page 157))
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
Error response
Error message Termination symbol
“ERR1” Undened control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
(CR)
0x0d
4 bytes 1 byte
■
When Web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect
mode)
z
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and
request for a connection to the projector.
You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK STATUS]
Port number
Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND
PORT]
2) Check the response from the projector
Response data
Data section Blank Mode
Termination
symbol
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘0’
0x30
(CR)
0x0d
9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode
Technical information
ENGLISH - 159
Appendix
z
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
Error response
Error message Termination symbol
“ERR1” Undened control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
(CR)
0x0d
4 bytes 1 byte
Technical information
160 - ENGLISH
Appendix
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal
The <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal of the projector conforms with RS-232C so that the projector can be
connected to and controlled from a computer.
■
Connection
When using 1 unit When using multiple units
Connecting terminals on projector 1
Connecting terminals on projector 2
D-Sub 9-pin
(female)
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
D-Sub 9-pin
(female)
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
Connecting terminals on this device
Computer Computer
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
D-Sub 9-pin
(female)
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Communication cable
Communication cable Communication cable
■
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(9) (6)
(5) (1)
(1) — NC
(2) TXD Transmitted data
(3) RXD Received data
(4) — Connected internally
(5) GND Earth
(6) — NC
(7) CTS
Connected internally
(8) RTS
(9) — NC
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(6) (9)
(1) (5)
(1) — NC
(2) RXD Received data
(3) TXD Transmitted data
(4) — NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) — NC
(7) RTS
Connected internally
(8) CTS
(9) — NC
■
Communication conditions
Signal level RS-232C-compliant Character length 8 bits
Sync. method Asynchronous Stop bit 1 bit
Baud rate 9 600 bps X parameter None
Parity None S parameter None
Technical information
ENGLISH - 161
Appendix
■
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
(2 bytes)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Semicolon (1 byte)
Colon
*1
㧔
1 byte
㧕
3 command
characters (3 bytes)
Parameter
(undefined length)
End
(1 byte)
Start
(1 byte)
ID designate
ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z
*1: When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
■
Basic format (with subcommands)
Parameter (6 bytes)
*1
Symbol “+” or “-” (1 byte) and setting
or adjustment value (5 bytes)
Operation (1 byte)
*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
Sub command
(5 bytes)
Same as the basic format
*1: When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, the operation (E ) and parameter are not necessary.
Attention
z
If a command is transmitted after the lamp starts illuminating, there may be a delay in response or the
command may not be executed. Try sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
z
When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the
response from the projector before sending the next command.
Note
z
If a command cannot be executed, a “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
z
If an invalid parameter is sent, a “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
z
ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
z
If a command is sent with a specied ID, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.

It matches the projector ID

ID setting is set to ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is [ON]

ID setting is set to GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is [ON]
z
STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
Technical information
162 - ENGLISH
Appendix
■
When multiple projectors are controlled
z
When multiple projectors are all controlled
When controlling multiple projectors together via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2)
z
When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit
When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2)
Note
z
There will be no response if 2 or more projectors have [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] set to [ON].
z
There will be no response if 2 or more projectors of the same group have [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] set to [ON].
z
When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.
■
Cable specication
z
When connected to a computer
z
When multiple projectors are connected
Projector
(<SERIAL IN>
terminal)
1 NC NC 1
Computer
(DTE
specications)
Projector 1
(<SERIAL OUT>
terminal)
1 NC NC 1
Projector 2
(<SERIAL IN>
terminal)
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 NC NC 4 4 NC NC 4
5 5 5 5
6 NC NC 6 6 NC NC 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 NC NC 9 9 NC NC 9
Technical information
ENGLISH - 163
Appendix
■
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
z
Projector control command
Command
Details Remarks (parameters)
PON Power on
To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
POF Power standby
QPW Power query 000 = Standby 001 = Power on
IIS
Switching the input
signal
VID=VIDEO RG1 = RGB1 RG2 = RGB2 DVI=DVI-D HD1 = HDMI
SD1 = SDI 1 (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
SD2 = SDI 2 (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
QSL
Query for active
lamp selection
0 = Quad
4 = Lamp 1/2/3
8 = Triple
*1
12 = Lamp 4
1 = Lamp 1/4
5 = Lamp 1/2/4
9 = Lamp 1
13 = Single
*1
2 = Lamp 2/3
6 = Lamp 1/3/4
10 = Lamp 2
3 = Dual
*1
7 = Lamp 2/3/4
11 = Lamp 3
LPM Lamp mode
0 = Quad
4 = Lamp 1/2/3
8 = Triple
*1
12 = Lamp 4
1 = Lamp 1/4
5 = Lamp 1/2/4
9 = Lamp 1
13 = Single
*1
2 = Lamp 2/3
6 = Lamp 1/3/4
10 = Lamp 2
3 = Dual
*1
7 = Lamp 2/3/4
11 = Lamp 3
Q$L
Lamp cumulative
operating time query
1 = Lamp 1 2 = Lamp 2 3 = Lamp 3 4 = Lamp 4
Response is 0000 to 2000
OSH Shutter 0 = End 1 = Execute
QSH Shutter status query 0 = End 1 = Execute
VSE Aspect switching
0 = Standard/ VID auto 1=4:3 2=16:9 5 = THROUGH
6 = HV FIT 9 = H FIT 10 = V FIT
QSE Aspect setting query
0 = Standard/ VID auto 1=4:3 2=16:9 5 = THROUGH
6 = HV FIT 9 = H FIT 10 = V FIT
OPP P IN P execute 0 = Off 1 = User 1 2 = User 2 3 = User 3
QPP P IN P setting query 0 = Off 1 = User 1 2 = User 2 3 = User 3
OCS
Sub memory
switching
01 to 96 = Sub memory number
QSB
Sub memory status
query
01 to 96 = Sub memory number
*1: Used from the lamp with the shortest cumulative operating time.
z
Projector control command (with sub command)
Command Sub command Details Notes
VXX RYCI1 RGB1 input setting +00000=RGB/YP
B
P
R
, +00001 = Y/C
z
Lens control command
Command Sub command Details Notes
VXX LNSI2 Lens H shift
+00000 = Fine tuning 1+, +00001 = Fine tuning 1–,
+00100 = Fine tuning 2+, +00101 = Fine tuning 2–,
+00200 = Coarse adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse
adjustment–
VXX LNSI3 Lens V shift
VXX LNSI4 Lens focus
VXX LNSI5 Lens zoom
Technical information
164 - ENGLISH
Appendix
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
It is possible to control the projector remotely (by external contact) from a control panel located away from the
projector where remote control signals cannot reach. Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting
terminals of the projector to connect to the control panel.
5HPRWHFRQWURO &RQWDFWFRQWURO
5HPRWHFRQWUROFRQWDFWFRQWURO
6WDQGE\ /LW
/DPS
5*% 9,'(2
5*% +'0,
'9,'
,QVWDOODWLRQORFDWLRQVLQPHHWLQJURRPVHWF
5HPRWHFRQWUROERDUGLQDQRWKHUORFDWLRQ
■
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin (Outside view) Pin No. Signal name Open (H) Short (L)
(9) (6)
(5) (1)
(1) GND — GND
(2) POWER OFF ON
(3) RGB1 Other RGB1
(4) RGB2 Other RGB2
(5) VIDEO Other VIDEO
(6) HDMI Other HDMI
(7) DVI-D Other DVI-D
(8) SHUTTER OFF ON
(9) RST/SET
Controlled by remote
control
Controlled by
external contact
Attention
z
When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
z
When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control
cannot be used.
The power on <
> button, the power standby < > button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the RS-232C
commands and network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either.
z
When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, do not short-circuit any pins from (3) to (7) with pin (1). The following
buttons on the control panel and the remote control cannot be used.
The power on < > button, the power standby < > button, <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button,
<VIDEO> button, <HDMI> button, <SDI 1/2> button, <SHUTTER> button, and the RS-232C commands and
network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either.
Note
z
For pin (2) to pin (8) settings, you can make changes if you set [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. (
page 110)
Technical information
ENGLISH - 165
Appendix
Two window display combination list
Sub window
Main window
RGB1 RGB2
VIDEO
input
DVI-D HDMI
SDI1
*4
SDI2
*4
Dual
link
HD
SDI
*4
RGB Movie
*3
Y/C
input
RGB Movie
*3
RGB
*2
Movie
*1
RGB
*2
Movie
*1
RGB1
RGB
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
―
Movie
*3
3 s s 3 s 3 s s s
―
Y/C input
3 s
―
3 s 3 s s s s
RGB2
RGB
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
―
Movie
3
3 s s s 3 s 3 s s s
―
VIDEO input
3 s
―
3 s 3 s 3 s s s s
DVI-D
RGB
*2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
― ―
Movie
*1
3 s s 3 s s 3 s s
― ―
HDMI
RGB
*2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
―
3
―
Movie
*1
3 s s 3 s s 3 s
―
s
―
SDI1
*4
3 s s 3 s s 3 s
― ―
s
―
SDI2
*4
3 s s 3 s s
― ―
3 s s
―
Dual link HD SDI
*4
― ―
s
― ―
s
― ― ― ― ― ―
3
: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible
s
: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible through the same frequency
-: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is not possible
*1: Only supports 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, and
1080/60p
*2: VGA (640 x 480) - WUXGA (1 920 x 1 200)
Non-interlace signal, dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
(The WUXGA signal is only compatible with VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking) signals.)
*3: 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, 1080/60p
*4: Only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE
Note
z
When the resolution of the sub window input signal exceeds 1 280 horizontal pixels, picture quality of the sub
window may deteriorate.
z
In the combination of
s
, if P IN P (picture in picture) is performed with the signals of the different frequency,
images in the sub window will not be displayed.
Technical information
166 - ENGLISH
Appendix
Control device password
To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
Upgrade kit
(only supports PT-DZ21KE and PT-DS20KE)
If the optional accessories upgrade kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is applied, the following functions are extended.
Function Standard status When the upgrade kit is applied
Adjustment range of [VERTICAL
KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Maximum of ±45°
*1
Adjustment range of [HORIZONTAL
KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±15°
*1
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Adjustment range of [CURVED]
Vertical arc Maximum of ±50
*1
Horizontal arc Maximum of ±50
*1
Vertical arc Maximum of ±100
*1
Horizontal arc Maximum of ±100
*1
[CUSTOM MASKING] Cannot be used. The image can be masked in optional form.
[PC CORRECTION] of
[UNIFORMITY]
Cannot be used.
The brightness and unevenness of color of the entire
screen can be corrected.
*1: The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range” (
pages 30, 31) for the possible projection range.
For details, Refer to the Upgrade Kit Operating Instructions included in the CD-ROM of optional upgrade kit (Model
No.: ET-UK20).
Technical information
ENGLISH - 167
Appendix
List of compatible signals
The following table species the types of signals compatible with the projector.
Mode
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning frequency
Dots
clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Plug and play
*1
Format
*2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
EDID1
DVI-D
EDID2
DVI-D
EDID3
HDMI
NTSC/NTSC4.43/
PAL-M/PAL60
720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 ―
― ― ― ― ―
V
PAL/PAL-N/SECAM 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 ―
― ― ― ― ―
V
525i (480i) 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5
― ― ― ― ―
R/Y/SDI
*10
625i (576i) 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5
― ― ― ― ―
R/Y/SDI
*10
525p (480p) 720 x 483 31.5 59.9 27.0
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y
625p (576p) 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y
1125 (1080)/60i
*3
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 24.0 74.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
―
3
―
3
―
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R/Y/SDI
1125 (1080)/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
*8*10
1125 (1080)/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
*8*10
2K/24p 2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
― ― ― ― ―
SDI
*9
2K/24sF 2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
― ― ― ― ―
SDI
*9
750 (720)/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
*10
750 (720)/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
―
3
―
3 3
D/H/R/Y/SDI
*10
VESA400
640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
VGA480
640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
3 3 3 3 3
D/H/R
640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
SVGA
800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
800 x 600 53.7 85.1 56.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
MAC16 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
MXGA
1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 152 x 864 64.0 71.2 94.2
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 152 x 864 67.5 74.9 108.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 152 x 864 76.7 85.0 121.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
MAC21 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
Technical information
168 - ENGLISH
Appendix
Mode
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning frequency
Dots
clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Plug and play
*1
Format
*2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
EDID1
DVI-D
EDID2
DVI-D
EDID3
HDMI
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 768
*4
47.4 60.0 68.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 800
*4
49.3 59.9 71.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 280 x 1 024 72.3 66.3 125.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 1 024 78.2 72.0 135.1
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
3
*5
―
3
*5
3
*5
3
*5
D/H/R
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 400 x 1 050 78.8 72.0 149.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
3
―
3 3 3
D/H/R
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 920 x 1 080
*4
66.6 59.9 138.5
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 920 x 1 080
*7
67.2 60.0 173.0
― ― ― ― ―
R
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
― ― ― ― ―
D/H/R
1 920 x 1 200
*4
74.0 60.0 154.0
3
―
3 3
*6
3
*6
D/H/R
1 920 x 1 200
*7
74.6 59.9 193.3
― ― ― ― ―
R
*1: Signals with a
3
in the Plug and Play columns are signals described in the projector’s EDID (extended display identication
data). If a signal has no
3
in the Plug and play columns but has an entry in the Format column, it can be entered. For signals
without a
3
in the Plug and play columns, there are instances that resolution cannot be selected in the computer even though the
projector supports them.
*2: Signals that show formats are as follows.
V: Video, Y/C
D: DVI-D
H: HDMI
R: RGB
Y: YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
SDI: SDI (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
*3: When a 1125 (1035)/60i signal was input, it is displayed as a 1125 (1080)/60i signal.
*4: VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) compatible
*5: Only for PT-DW17KE
*6: Only for PT-DZ21KE
Technical information
ENGLISH - 169
Appendix
*7: Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
*8: SDI 1 only
*9: For dual link connections only
*10: For single link connections only
Note
z
There are 1 920 x 1 200 display dots for PT-DZ21KE, 1 400 x 1 050 for PT-DS20KE, and 1 366 x 768 for
PT-DW17KE.
A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots and displayed.
z
The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
z
When interlaced signals are connected, ickering may occur on the projected image.
■
List of 3D compatible signals (only for PT-DZ21KE, PT-DS20KE)
The following table species the 3D compatible image signals that the projector can project.
Items that are applicable to (1) to (7) in the table are as follows.
(1) Frame packing method
(2) Side by side method
(3) Top and bottom method
(4) Line by line method
(5) Frame sequential method
(6) 3G-SDI Level B simultaneous method
(7) Simultaneous method
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning frequency
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
(1) (2)
*1
(3) (2)
*1
(3) (4) (5)
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
3 3 3 3 3 3
―
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
3 3 3 3 3 3
―
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3 ―
3
―
3 3
― ―
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 ―
3
―
3 3
― ―
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
3 3 3 3 3
― ―
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 24.0 74.3 ― ― ―
3 3
― ―
1080/25P 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 ― ― ―
3 3
― ―
1080/30P 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3 ― ― ―
3 3
― ―
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5 ―
3 3 3 3
― ―
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 ―
3 3 3 3
― ―
VGA480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
SVGA 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 ― ― ― ― ― ―
3
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1 ― ― ― ― ― ―
3
MXGA 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8 ― ― ― ― ― ―
3
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6 ― ― ― ― ― ―
3
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 768
*2
47.4 60.0 68.3 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 800
*2
49.3 59.9 71.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
Technical information
170 - ENGLISH
Appendix
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning frequency
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
(1) (2)
*1
(3) (2)
*1
(3) (4) (5)
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 920 x 1 080
*2
66.6 59.9 138.5 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 ― ― ―
3
― ― ―
1 920 x 1 200
*2
74.0 60.0 154.0 ― ― ―
3
―
3
―
*1: Supports half.
*2: VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) compatible
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning
frequency
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
RGB1/RGB2 SDI1/SDI2
HDMI
&
DVI-D
RGB1
&
RGB2
SDI1
&
SDI2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
(2)
*1
(3) (4) (5) (2)
*1
(3) (4) (6)
*3
(7) (7) (7)
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
3 3 3
―
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
3 3 3
―
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 24.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/25P 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/30P 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
3 3
― ―
3 3
―
3 3 3 3
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
3 3
― ―
3
*3
3
*3
― ―
3 3
―
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
3 3
― ―
3
*3
3
*3
― ―
3 3
―
VGA480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
SVGA 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
XGA
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 ― ― ―
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1 ― ― ―
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
MXGA 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8 ― ― ―
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6 ― ― ―
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 768
*2
47.4 60.0 68.3
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 800
*2
49.3 59.9 71.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
SXGA
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Technical information
ENGLISH - 171
Appendix
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning
frequency
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
RGB1/RGB2 SDI1/SDI2
HDMI
&
DVI-D
RGB1
&
RGB2
SDI1
&
SDI2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
(2)
*1
(3) (4) (5) (2)
*1
(3) (4) (6)
*3
(7) (7) (7)
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
SXGA+
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
WXGA+
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
WSXGA+
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 920 x 1 080
*2
66.6 59.9 138.5
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
WUXGA
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
3
― ― ― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
1 920 x 1 200
*2
74.0 60.0 154.0
3
―
3
― ― ― ― ―
3 3
―
*1: Supports half.
*2: VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) compatible
*3: Only supports SDI 1
Specications
172 - ENGLISH
Appendix
The following table describes the specications of the projector.
Model No. PT-DZ21KE PT-DS20KE PT-DW17KE
Power supply AC 200 V - 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
2 300 W (12 A)
(0.3 W when standby mode is set to [ECO], and 9 W when set to [NORMAL])
DLP chips
Panel size
24.4 mm (0.96")
(aspect ratio 16:10)
24.1 mm (0.95")
(aspect ratio 4:3)
21.6 mm (0.85")
(aspect ratio 16:9)
Display method 3-unit DLP chips, DLP type
Number of pixels
2 304 000 pixels
(1 920 x 1 200 dots) x 3 panels
1 470 000 pixels
(1 400 x 1 050 dots) x 3 panels
1 049 088 pixels
(1 366 x 768 dots) x 3 panels
Lens Optional
Luminous lamp 465 W UHM lamp x 4
Light output
*1
20 000 lm (ANSI) 17 000 lm (ANSI)
Applicable
scanning
frequency
*2
For RGB signal
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz to 120 Hz
PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
Dot clock frequency
162 MHz or less
For YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals
[480i] H: 15.73 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz
[480p] H: 31.5 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz
[720/50p] H: 37.5 kHz, V: 50 Hz
[1035/60i] H: 33.75 kHz, V: 60 Hz
[1080/60i] H: 33.75 kHz, V: 60 Hz
[1080/25p] H: 28.13 kHz, V: 25 Hz
[1080/30p] H: 33.75 kHz, V: 30 Hz
[1080/50p] H: 56.25 kHz, V: 50 Hz
[576i] H: 15.63 kHz, V: 50 Hz
[576p] H: 31.25 kHz, V: 50 Hz
[720/60p] H: 45 kHz, V: 60 Hz
[1080/50i] H: 28.13 kHz, V: 50 Hz
[1080/24p] H: 27 kHz, V: 24 Hz
[1080/24sF] H: 27 kHz, V: 48 Hz
[1080/60p] H: 67.5 kHz, V: 60 Hz
z
The HD/SYNC and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
For video signals
(including Y/C
signals)
Horizontal: 15.75 kHz/15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz/60 Hz
For DVI-D signal
For HDMI signal
480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60p, 1080/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p,
1080/25p, 1080/24p
z
Displayable resolution: VGA to WUXGA (non-interlaced)
z
Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
For SDI signal
[SD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 259 compliant
[YC
B
C
R
4:2:2 10-bit]
480i, 576i
—
[Single link HD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 292 compliant
[YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit]
720/50p, 720/60p, 1035/60i,
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,
1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
[Dual link HD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 372 compliant
[RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit]
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,
1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p,
[X’Y’Z’ 4:4:4 12-bit]
2048 x 1080/24p,
2048 x 1080/24sF
[3G-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 424 compliant
[YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit]
1080/50p, 1080/60p
[RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit]
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,
1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
z
The 3G-SDI signal is only compatible with SDI 1.
Color system 7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)
Projection screen size 1.78 m (70") - 15.24 m (600")
*3
Screen aspect ratio 16:10 4:3 16:9
Projection method FRONT CEILING/FRONT FLOOR/REAR CEILING/REAR FLOOR
Specications
Specications
ENGLISH - 173
Appendix
Model No. PT-DZ21KE PT-DS20KE PT-DW17KE
Contrast ratio 10 000:1 (when [DYNAMIC IRIS] is set to [3])
Terminals
<RGB 1 IN>
terminal
1 set (BNC x 5 (RGB/YP
B
P
R
/YC
B
C
R
/YC x 1))
[RGB signal] 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
HD/SYNC TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity
compatible
[YP
B
P
R
signal]
Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p]
75 Ω
[Y/C signal] Y: 1.0 V [p-p], C: 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<RGB 2 IN>
terminal
1 set, high-density D-Sub 15p (female)
[RGB signal] 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
HD/SYNC TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity
compatible
[YP
B
P
R
signal]
Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p]
75 Ω
<VIDEO IN>
terminal
1 set, BNC 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<DVI-D IN>
terminal
1 set, DVI-D 24 p single link, DVI 1.0 compatible, HDCP compliant
<HDMI IN>
terminal
1 set, HDMI 19 pin, (HDCP and Deep color compatible)
<SDI IN 1>
terminal
1 set (BNC)
—
[SD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 259 compliant
[HD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 292 compliant
[3G-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 424 compliant
[Dual link HD-SDI (LINK-A)
signal]
SMPTE ST 372 compliant
<SDI IN 2>
terminal
1 set (BNC)
—
[SD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 259 compliant
[HD-SDI signal] SMPTE ST 292 compliant
[Dual link HD-SDI (LINK-B)
signal]
SMPTE ST 372 compliant
<3D SYNC 1 IN/
OUT> terminal
1 set (BNC)
—
During input setting TTL high impedance
During output setting TTL output max. 10 mA
<3D SYNC 2 OUT>
terminal
1 set (BNC)
—
TTL output max. 10mA
<SERIAL IN>/
<SERIAL OUT>
terminal
D-Sub 9 p, each set, RS-232C compatible, for computer control
<REMOTE 1 IN>/
<REMOTE 1 OUT>
terminal
M3 stereo mini jack, each set, remote control for serial control
<REMOTE 2 IN>
terminal
1 set D-Sub 9 p for contact control
<LAN> terminal 1 set, (for RJ-45 network connection, PJLink compatible, 10Base-T/100Base-TX)
Power cable length 3.0 m (118-1/8")
Outer case Molded plastic
Specications
174 - ENGLISH
Appendix
Model No. PT-DZ21KE PT-DS20KE PT-DW17KE
Dimensions
Width: 620 mm (24-13/32"), Height: 255 mm (10-1/32") (excluding the legs),
Depth: 730 mm (28-3/4") (excluding the projection lens cover)
Weight Approx 43.0 k
g
(94.8 lbs.)
*4
Operating environment
Operating environment temperature
*5
: 0°C (32°F) to 45°C (113°F)
Operating environment humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Remote
control
Power supply DC 3 V (AA/R6 battery x 2)
Operating range Approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
Weight 134
g
(4.7 ozs.) (including batteries)
Dimensions Width: 51 mm (2"), Height: 176 mm (6-15/16"), Depth: 28 mm (1-3/32")
*1: Measurement, measuring conditions and method of notation all comply with ISO21118 international standards.
*2: Refer to “List of compatible signals” (
page 167) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.
*3: 1.78 m - 7.62 m (70" - 300") when ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE50 projection lens is attached.
*4: Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*5: When using the projector at high elevations 1 400 m (4 593 ft) – 2 700 m (8 858 ft) from sea level, operating environment
temperature will be 0°C (32°F) to 40°C (104°F).
When using a smoke cut lter, the temperature will be 0°C (32°F) to 35°C (95°F). However, it cannot be used at high elevations.
z
The part numbers of accessories and separately sold components are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions
ENGLISH - 175
Appendix
Dimensions
36
(1-13/32")
620
(24-13/32")
177
(6-31/32")
291 (11-15/32")
70
(2-3/4")
730 (28-3/4")
Unit: mm
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
Ceiling mount bracket safeguards
176 - ENGLISH
Appendix
z
When installing the projector to a ceiling, be sure to use the specied ceiling mount bracket (Model No.:
ET-PKD510H (for high ceilings), ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings)).
z
When installing the projector, attach the drop-prevention set included with the ceiling mount bracket to the
projector.
If you need the drop-prevention set (hex bolt with washer (M10 x 40), wire rope: TTRA0143) separately, consult
your dealer.
z
Request for a qualied technician to do the installation.
z
Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of a ceiling mount bracket
not manufactured by Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installation, even if the warranty
period of the projector has not expired.
z
Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualied technician.
z
Referring to the screw holes for ceiling mount diagram below, use screws of sufcient length to reach the
imbedded nuts.
z
Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specied tightening torques. Do not
use tools such as electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
z
For details, read the installation manual that comes with the ceiling mount bracket.
z
The part numbers of accessories and separately sold components are subject to change without notice.
110
(4-11/32")
145
(5-23/32")
48
(1-7/8")
298 (11-23/32")
548 (21-9/16")
25 mm (31/32")
12 mm (15/32")
12 mm (15/32")
30 mm (1-3/16")
30 mm (1-3/16")
110
(4-11/32")
135.5
(5-11/32")
145
(5-23/32")
110
(4-11/32")
M6
M6
Bottom view
Model No. of ceiling mount bracket: ET-PKD510H (for high ceilings)
ET-PKD510S (for low ceilings)
Torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m
Screw holes for ceiling mount
Screw hole depthMax. screw hole depth
Max. screw hole depth
Embedded nut
(Screw hole depth)
Space
Unit: mm
Ceiling mount bracket safeguards
Index
ENGLISH - 177
Appendix
Index
Numerics
[3D COLOR MATCHING] ……………………… 84
[3D FRAME DELAY] …………………………… 86
[3D INPUT FORMAT] …………………………… 84
[3D PICTURE BALANCE] ……………………… 85
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] ………………… 87
[3D SETTINGS] …………………………… 63, 82
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]…………………… 83
[3D SYNC SETTING] …………………………… 82
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] ………………………… 82
[3D TEST MODE] ………………………………… 86
[3D TEST PATTERN] …………………………… 86
A
Accessories ……………………………………… 19
<AC IN> terminal …………………………… 24, 48
Adjustable feet …………………………………… 42
[ADVANCED MENU] ……………………… 63, 77
Air lter unit ………………………………………144
Air lter unit compartment ………………………146
[ASPECT] ………………………………………… 72
<ASPECT> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 60
Aspect function …………………………………… 60
Attaching/removing the projection lens ………… 43
Automatic setup function ………………………… 59
[AUTO SETUP] …………………………………… 91
<AUTO SETUP> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 59
Remote control ………………………… 22, 59
[AUTO SIGNAL] ………………………………… 90
B
[BACK COLOR] ………………………………… 95
[BLANKING] ……………………………………… 77
[BRIGHTNESS] ………………………………… 66
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] ……………………102
C
Cautions on use ………………………………… 18
Cautions when installing ………………………… 15
Cautions when transporting …………………… 15
Ceiling mount bracket ……………………………176
Ceiling mount bracket safeguards ………………176
[CLAMP POSITION] …………………………… 78
[CLOCK PHASE] ………………………………… 74
[COLOR] ………………………………………… 66
[COLOR MATCHING] …………………………… 88
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] ……………………… 66
Connecting the power cord ……………………… 48
Connection ……………………………………… 44
[CONTRAST] …………………………………… 66
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
…124
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] …………………122
[COOLING CONDITION] ………………………100
[CUT OFF] ………………………………………… 98
D
[DARK TIME SETTING] ………………………… 85
[DATE AND TIME] ………………………………110
<DEFAULT> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 62
Deleting a registered data ………………………118
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] …………………… 77
Dimensions ………………………………………175
Display language …………………………… 63, 81
[DISPLAY OPTION] ………………………… 64, 88
[DISPLAY SETTING] ……………………………122
Disposal …………………………………………… 18
<DVI-D> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[DVI-D IN] ………………………………………… 92
[DYNAMIC IRIS] ………………………………… 69
E
[EDGE BLENDING] ……………………………… 78
<ENTER> button
Projector body ……………………………… 25
Remote control ……………………………… 22
Expanding signal lock-in range …………………119
F
Filter indicator ……………………………………143
<FOCUS> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 52
[FRAME LOCK] ………………………………… 80
[FRAME RESPONSE] …………………………… 80
[FREEZE] ………………………………………… 96
<FUNC> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 59
Function button ……………………………… 59, 110
G
[GAMMA] ………………………………………… 68
[GEOMETRY] …………………………………… 74
H
<HDMI> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[HDMI IN] ………………………………………… 93
[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] ………………………100
I
<ID ALL> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 27
<ID SET> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 27
[INITIALIZE] ………………………………………114
Initial setting ……………………………………… 21
[INPUT RESOLUTION] ………………………… 78
Input selection terminal indicator ……………… 25
K
[KEYSTONE] ……………………………………… 76
L
Lamp indicator ……………………………………142
[LAMP RELAY] ……………………………………101
[LAMP SELECT] …………………………………100
Lamp unit cover ………………………………… 24
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION] …………… 89
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] …………………………… 84
<LENS> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 52
[LENS CALIBRATION] ………………………… 111
[LENS MEMORY] …………………………………112
<LIGHT> button
Remote control ……………………………… 22
<LIGHT> switch
Projector body ……………………………… 25
List of compatible signals ………………………167
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] ………………………113
<LOCK> button
Remote control ……………………………… 23
M
Main menu ………………………………………… 62
Main power switch ………………………… 24, 50
Maintenance ………………………………………144
Managing the sub memory list …………………120
<MENU> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 61
Remote control ………………………… 22, 61
Menu item ………………………………………… 63
N
Navigating through the menu …………………… 61
[NETWORK] ………………………………… 64, 125
Network connections ……………………………126
[NETWORK CONTROL] …………………………125
[NETWORK SETUP] ……………………………125
[NETWORK STATUS] ……………………………125
[NOISE REDUCTION] …………………………… 69
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] ………………………110
O
<ON SCREEN> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] ………………………… 94
On-screen menu ………………………………… 61
Optional accessories …………………………… 20
P
[PICTURE] …………………………………… 63, 65
[PICTURE MODE] ……………………………… 65
[P IN P] ……………………………………… 64, 115
P IN P function ……………………………………115
[POSITION]
………………………………… 63, 72
Power cord ……………………………………… 48
Power indicator ………………………………… 49
Power on button
Projector body ……………………………… 25
Remote control ……………………………… 22
Power standby button
Projector body ……………………………… 25
Remote control ……………………………… 22
Precautions for use ……………………………… 15
Projecting ………………………………………… 52
[PROJECTION METHOD] ………………… 28, 99
Projector body …………………………………… 24
[PROJECTOR ID] ………………………………… 99
[PROJECTOR SETUP] …………………… 64, 99
Protecting a registered data ……………………119
R
[RASTER POSITION] …………………………… 80
Read this rst! ……………………………………… 2
Registering a signal to the list …………………118
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal ……………………… 27
<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal …………………… 27
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal ………………………164
[REMOTE2 MODE] ………………………………110
Remote control …………………………………… 22
Remote control operations ……………………… 58
Renaming the registered data …………………118
Replacing the air lter unit ………………………146
Replacing the lamp unit …………………………148
Replacing the unit…………………………………146
Resetting to the factory default ………………… 62
<RGB1> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
<RGB2> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[RGB IN]…………………………………………… 92
[RS-232C] ………………………………… 108, 160
S
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] ……… 87
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] …………………………113
[SCHEDULE]………………………………………106
[SCREEN SETTING] …………………………… 90
<SDI 1/2> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[SDI IN] …………………………………………… 93
Security …………………………………………… 18
[SECURITY] ………………………………… 64, 121
[SECURITY PASSWORD] ………………………121
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] …………121
Selecting the input signal ……………………… 52
Self-diagnosis display ……………………… 25, 153
<SERIAL IN> terminal ……………………………160
<SERIAL OUT> terminal …………………………160
[SERVICE PASSWORD] …………………………114
Setting Remote control ID numbers …………… 27
Setting up ………………………………………… 28
[SHARPNESS] …………………………………… 68
[SHIFT] …………………………………………… 72
<SHIFT> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 52
<SHUTTER> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
[SHUTTER SETTING] …………………………… 96
[SIGNAL LIST] ……………………………… 64, 118
Specications ……………………………………172
sRGB compliant images ………………………… 71
[STANDBY MODE] ………………………………106
[STARTUP LOGO] ……………………………… 95
[STATUS] …………………………………………109
<STATUS> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 59
Switch input signal ……………………………… 58
Switch off the projector ………………………… 51
Index
178 - ENGLISH
Appendix
Switch on the projector. ………………………… 50
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] …………………… 68
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] ………………………… 70
T
Temperature indicator ……………………………143
<TEST> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 60
[TEST PATTERN] …………………………… 64, 117
[TEXT CHANGE] …………………………………122
[TINT] ……………………………………………… 66
Troubleshooting …………………………………151
Two window display ………………………………165
U
[UNIFORMITY] …………………………………… 95
Upgrade kit ………………………………………166
V
<VIDEO> button
Projector body ………………………… 25, 58
Remote control ………………………… 22, 58
W
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] ……………………… 96
Z
[ZOOM] …………………………………………… 73
<ZOOM> button
Remote control ………………………… 22, 52
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household
waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could
otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact
your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the
items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier
for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site : http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/
© Panasonic Corporation 2012
W0512YY0 -YI
Environment care information for users in China
This symbol is only valid in China.
1 …

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Panasonic PT-DW17KE wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Panasonic PT-DW17KE

Panasonic PT-DW17KE Bedienungsanleitung - Deutsch - 190 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info